JP6623980B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area. Done. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and at the time of the final stop display of the variation display, the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed. A display effect for one game time to be displayed is executed. Further, when the lottery result is a so-called winning game transition winning, for example, after a display effect for one game is performed, for example, the opening and closing of a variable winning device provided in the game area is executed, The payout of the game balls according to the number of balls entered into the winning device is executed.

  Further, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which information used for a winning lottery is held and stored when a game ball enters a starting ball entry portion while a pattern is being displayed for change. In the case where the image is held and stored, after the variable display of the pattern is finished, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and held, and the next variable display of the pattern is started (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-003004

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes a launching unit that launches a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
In the game area, at least a first start ball entry section and a second start ball entry section are provided as a start ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
This gaming machine
Acquiring means for acquiring predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first starting ball entry section, and acquiring predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the second starting ball entry section; ,
A first predetermined information storage unit that stores the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining unit when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry unit, with a first specified number as an upper limit;
A second predetermined information storage unit that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the second start entry unit, with a second specified number as an upper limit;
A shift determination is made as to whether the predetermined information corresponds to the shift correspondence information, and the shift is performed for each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit. Shift determination means for performing determination,
A game turn control means for controlling a game turn execution means so that a game turn operation is executed in correspondence with the execution of the shift determination;
Period determining means for determining a continuation period of the game round operation,
When the predetermined information targeted for the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, an advantageous transition unit that transitions a gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player,
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining means at a timing earlier than the stored predetermined information is stored in the first predetermined information storage. Priority means for causing the transition determination to be performed on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if stored in the means;
Destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the specific information corresponds to the migration corresponding information before the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is subjected to the migration determination When,
In the case where it is specified by the preceding specifying means that the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous gaming state ends, Special effect execution means for executing a special effect for allowing the player to recognize that the game state has not ended,
With
When the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is a target of the shift determination, the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means is a target of the shift determination. Is more advantageous than
The period determining means is configured to execute the game cycle executed after the release condition is satisfied, as the continuation period from the end of the advantageous game state to the release condition being satisfied, regardless of the specification result of the destination specifying means. Short-term determination means for determining a period shorter than a predetermined duration selected in the operation for
The release conditions state, and are said advantageously gaming state is executed the number of times of operation for the game times from the end corresponding to the number smaller than said second prescribed number,
The special effect execution means is configured to determine that the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous game state ends. When specified, the game replay operation triggered by the specific predetermined information corresponds to the number of times the game replay operation is executed after the end of the advantageous game state, which is smaller than the second prescribed number. When the number of executions is less than or equal to the number of times, a special effect that allows the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state has not ended is executed .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to aim at the entertainment improvement of a game suitably.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in one embodiment. (A) It is a front view showing the composition of a game board, and (b) is a longitudinal section for explaining a variable winning device. It is a rear view for explaining various winning detection sensors. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a success / failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability mode, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability mode, (c) Distribution for upper working ports It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a table, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for lower working ports. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for working ports performed by the MPU of the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command corresponding process executed by the MPU of the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control processing performed by MPU of a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a data setting process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a type determination process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot winning number specification process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit information identification processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit information identification process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special round number setting process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hold | maintenance information correspondence process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the shift processing at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot winning number specification process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st addition lottery table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd addition lottery table. It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an execution area. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control processing performed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the simultaneous digestion process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a command corresponding process executed by the MPU of the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the simultaneous fluctuation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process after simultaneous digestion determination performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hits information specific processing performed by MPU of a main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit information identification process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening and closing process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows information specific processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the success / failure determination processing in suspension performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd hold | right approval / disapproval determination processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the success / failure determination processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st holding | maintenance right / wrong determination process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display control process executed by the MPU of the display control device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image which notifies that the extension of the round game was confirmed, and (b) that the acquired hold information includes the hold information corresponding to a jackpot winning FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for describing an image that notifies. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by the MPU of the main control device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image displayed in a 1st special ending effect, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image displayed in a 2nd special ending effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image displayed in the extended waiting period of a round game, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image displayed when opening and closing execution mode for extension is started. It is. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display time-related process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of the game. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd suspension right or wrong judgment processing performed by MPU of the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st holding | maintenance right / wrong determination process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display time-related process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd hold | right approval / disapproval determination processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending period setting process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an opening period setting process executed by the MPU of the main control device.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a type of gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. . The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions being a supporting side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being a supporting side. A back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions being a support side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on a cylinder lock 17 provided to be exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the configuration of the game board 20 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

  The gaming board 20 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper working opening (first starting entering ball portion) 23, a lower working opening (second starting entering ball portion) 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, A display section 33 for the upper working port, a display section 34 for the lower working port, a display section 35 for accessory, and the like are provided respectively.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating opening 23, and the lower operating opening 24, it is detected by various winning detecting sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, arranged on the back side of the gaming board 20. 24c, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. In addition, a large number of nails 28 are planted on the game board 20 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Some embodiments are not included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the game ball enters the variable winning device 22, the upper operation port 23, the lower operation port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as winning.

  The upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are unitized as working port devices and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are open upward. The two working ports 23 and 24 are arranged vertically with the upper working port 23 facing upward. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 24a is connected to an electric accessory driving unit 24b mounted on the back side of the game board 20, and is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 24b to be in a closed state (unsupported state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 24a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 24, and when the electric accessory 24a is opened, the lower operating port 24 can be awarded.

  The present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the state of the electric ball into a state in which a prize of the game ball to the lower working port 24 is easily generated and a state in which a prize is not easily generated but is not impossible but a prize is harder to be generated than the state in which the prize is more easily generated. The configuration may be such that the accessory 24a can be switched. Further, the electric accessory 24a may not be provided, and switching between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the lower working port 24 itself.

  As shown in FIG. 2 (b), the variable winning device 22 has a large winning opening 22a communicating with the back side of the game board 20, and has an opening / closing door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. . The opening / closing door 22b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 22c integrally provided as the variable winning device 22 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 22c to close and open. Placed in any of Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state where it cannot be won, and when an internal lottery is selected to shift to the open / close execution mode, the game ball is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be easily won. The open / close execution mode will be described later in detail.

  Here, various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c and 25a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view for explaining various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, and 25a.

  As shown in FIG. 3, an assembly plate unit 29 is provided below the variable display unit 26 on the back of the game board 20. The collecting plate unit 29 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls that have won various winning ports, a winning detecting mechanism for detecting winning of game balls to various winning ports, and the like. .

  A description will be given of the game ball collecting mechanism. In the collecting board unit 29, the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 correspond to the game board openings and are located at one location on the downstream side. A collecting passage 29a that gathers is formed. Therefore, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 21 and the like gather below the game board 20 via the collection passage 29a. There is a discharge passage below the game board 20, and the game balls gathered below the game board 20 by the collection passage 29a are led out into the discharge passage. The outlet 27 also communicates with the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings 21, 22, 23, and 24 are led out of the discharge passage through the outlet 27.

  Explaining the winning detection mechanism, the collecting plate unit 29 is provided with a winning port sensor 21a at a position corresponding to each of the general winning ports 21 on the front side of the game board 20. A count sensor 22d is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 22, an upper operating port sensor 23a is provided at a position corresponding to the upper operating port 23, and a lower operating port sensor 24c is provided at a position corresponding to the lower operating port 24. Is provided. On the right side of the variable display unit 26 outside the assembly plate unit 29, a gate sensor 25a for detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 25 is provided. The winning of the game ball is detected by the sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, 25a as the ball detection sensors (game medium detecting means). These sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, 25a output electric signals to a main control device 60 described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be employed in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It may be configured to output an electric signal only in a state in which is detected.

  In the display section 33 for the upper operating port shown in FIG. 2A, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper operating port 23 as a trigger. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the result is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the upper operating port 23 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the upper operating port display unit 33. After the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  In the lower operating port display section 34, a pattern change display is performed with a winning in the lower operating port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning in the lower operating port 24 is performed. The result of is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the lower operating port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the lower operating port display unit 34. After the fluctuation display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning in the upper operating port 23 and the winning in the lower operating port 24 are distinguished in the internal lottery, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operating port 23 is performed. Is displayed on the upper operating port display section 33, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the lower operating port 24 is displayed on the lower operating port display section.

  The upper working port display section 33 and the lower working port display section 34 are each configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be constituted by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as a pattern variably displayed on the upper operating port display section 33 and the lower operating port display section 34, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, A configuration in which the type of character is variably displayed or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the display unit 35 for the special item, the display of the pattern is changed with the winning of the through gate 25 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 25 is displayed. Specified by indication. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric-power-open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 35 and displayed in a fluctuating manner. Is stopped, and then the state shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric-power-opened state, the electric-powered accessory 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 for variably displaying (or variable display or switching display) a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and a center frame 32 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 31. Have been. The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 100 described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display screen G such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be a display.

  In the symbol display device 31, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed on the upper operating port display unit 33 or the lower operating port display unit 34, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly.

  The display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern is composed of nine types of main patterns each having a number of “1” to “9” and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character designs such as an octopus are numbered "1" to "9" to form a main design.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5.

  When an effect for playing a game is performed on the display screen G based on winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. Is started to be displayed. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for playing the game. Production ends.

  Further, when the effect for the game round ends, if the game round corresponds to the jackpot result, a combination of symbols in which the same number is attached to any one of the activated lines is formed.

  In addition, the form of the symbol change display in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variable display in the symbol columns, the number of symbols in each symbol column, and the like are included. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

  Further, a first reserved number display area Ga and a second reserved number display area Gb are set below the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Specifically, the first reserved number display area Ga is set on the lower left side of the display screen G, and the second reserved number display area Gb is set on the lower right side of the display screen G.

  In the present embodiment, the winning in the upper operating port 23 and the winning in the lower operating port 24 are distinguished, and the first reserved number display area Ga holds the winning history of the upper operating port 23 on hold. The number is displayed, and in the second reserved number display area Gb, the number in which the winning history to the lower operation port 24 is retained and stored is displayed.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number that can hold the winning history to the upper working port 23 and the number that can hold the winning history to the lower working port 24 are 255, respectively. Are set.

  Here, for example, when the number of the winning histories stored in the upper working port 23 is one, “1” is displayed in the first reserved number display area Ga, and the winning history of the upper working port 23 is displayed. In the case where the number of the reserved items is 255, “255” is displayed in the first reserved number display area Ga. Similarly, when the number of winning histories stored in the lower operating port 24 is one, “1” is displayed in the second reserved number display area Gb, and the winning history of the lower operating port 24 is held. When the stored number is 255, “255” is displayed in the second reserved number display area Gb.

  Further, when the winning histories to the operating ports 23 and 24 are not held and stored, the numbers are not displayed in the held number display areas Ga and Gb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning histories to the operating ports 23 and 24 are not held and stored, “0” may be displayed in the held number display areas Ga and Gb. .

  The game board 20 has an inner rail portion 41 and an outer rail portion 42 attached thereto. The inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42 form a guide rail, and are mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. A game ball fired from a played game ball launching mechanism (not shown) is guided to an upper portion of the game area. The game ball firing mechanism performs a shooting operation of the game ball when a firing handle 51 provided on the front door frame 14 is operated.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 52 so that almost the entire game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window 52 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 53 is fitted therein. The window panel 53 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of synthetic resin and colorless and transparent. By the way, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, the upper operating port display section 33, the lower operating port display section 34, and the like are visible through the window panel 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Around the window 52, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp section 54 is provided above the window section 52 as a part of the various lamp sections. Further, on both left and right sides of the display lamp section 54, there are provided speaker sections 55 for outputting sound effects and the like according to a game situation.

  Below the window 52 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 56 and a lower bulging portion 57 bulging toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 56a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 56, and a lower plate 57a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 57. The upper plate 56a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device 71 described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball firing mechanism side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 57a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 56a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 71 mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a.

  On the rear side of the inner frame, a main controller 60, a sound emission controller 90, and a display controller 100 are mounted. As described above, the back pack unit is provided on the back of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device 71, a payout control device 70, a power supply and a firing control. The device 80 is mounted. Hereinafter, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 for controlling a main game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 for monitoring a power supply. In the main control device 60, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening may be provided to the board box accommodating the main control board 61 and the like, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening may be provided. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably joined together and a connection portion (caulking portion) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation or an adhesive layer is applied to an object to be adhered when peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box may be considered.

  The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, and each may be configured individually as a chip. This is the same for the MPUs of the control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 60. In this case, a power supply having a function of supplying operating power and a launch control device 80 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, 24c, and 25a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In the MPU 62, a prize-winning determination (ball-entry determination) for each of the ball entry units is performed. In the MPU 62, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24.

  To the output side of the MPU 62, a power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and a sound emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 70 based on the result of the prize determination for the prize-corresponding ball entry section.

  Various commands such as a variation command and a type command are output to the sound emission control device 90. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the main control device 60 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 22c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, an electric accessory driving unit 24b for opening and closing the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24, and an upper operating port Display section 33, lower working port display section 34, and accessory display section 35 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the variable winning drive unit 22c so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. When the open state of the electric accessory 24a is won, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the electric accessory drive unit 24b so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed. In addition, at the time of each game, the MPU 62 controls the display of the upper operating port display unit 33 or the lower operating port display unit 34. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 35 is executed in the MPU 62.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and the firing control device 80, and monitors a 24 V DC stable voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and the firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 controls the payout of the prize balls and the loaned balls by the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power supply and the launch control device 80 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply and the firing control device 80 are provided with a power supply unit at the time of power failure such as a backup capacitor. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60. The power supply and launch control device 80 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91 on which an MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

  The MPU 92 controls the driving of the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on the command received from the main control device 60. In addition, these commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 as they are or the corresponding commands after the analysis. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101 on which an MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107 are mounted, each of which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip. It has.

  The MPU 102 controls the VDP 105 (specifically, generates an internal command for the VDP 105) by analyzing various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performing a predetermined arithmetic process based on the various commands received.

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require external power supply when storing the stored information. The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply when retaining the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 105 is formed as an IC chip, the VDP 105 is also called a “drawing chip”, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data. The VDP 105 reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing, and displays it on the symbol display device 31.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table which is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31, and the display content of the symbol display device 31 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 62 uses a variety of counter information during the game to generate a jackpot, to set the display of the upper operating port display unit 33 or the lower operating port display unit 34, to set the symbol display of the symbol display device 31, and to display the accessory. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the jackpot occurrence, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type as shown in FIG. A reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 31 comes off and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a display unit 33, 34, and a symbol display. A fluctuation type counter CS for determining a fluctuation display time in the device 31 is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is to be in the electric opening state is used. The counters C1 to C4, CINI and CS are provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. When a winning occurs in the operating ports 23 and 24, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64a provided in the RAM 64 as acquisition information storage means. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area 64a includes a first reserved area Ra, a second reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first holding area Ra includes a first holding area Ra1 to a 255-th holding area Ra255, and according to the winning history of the upper operating port 23, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3. Are stored in any of the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 as holding information. In this case, when winning in the upper operating port 23 occurs plural times consecutively, each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the n-th holding area → the (n + 1) -th holding area.

  Further, the first holding area Ra has a first holding number storage area NA, and stores information for specifying the number of holding winning prizes to the upper operating port 23. The first reserved number storage area NA is set to one byte.

  The second holding area Rb includes a first holding area Rb1 to a 255th holding area Rb255, and according to a winning history to the lower operation port 24, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter. The combination of the numerical information of C3 is stored as the hold information in any of the hold areas Rb1 to Rb255. In this case, when a winning in the lower operating port 24 occurs multiple times in succession, each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the n-th reserved area → the (n + 1) -th reserved area.

  Further, the second holding area Rb includes a second holding number storage area NB, and stores information for specifying the number of the winning histories to the lower operation port 24 held and stored. The second reserved number storage area NB is set to 1 byte.

  According to the present embodiment, up to 255 pieces of hold information can be stored in each of the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb. Here, if the number that can be held and stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is set to a number that can be easily reached, the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 There is a possibility that a situation in which the holding information cannot be stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb may occur more frequently even though a winning has occurred. In this regard, according to this configuration, the number of items that can be held in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is set to 255. It is unlikely that they can be obtained. As a result, when a prize occurs in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24, a situation occurs in which the hold information cannot be stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb. The frequency can be reduced.

  The execution area AE is the numerical information stored in the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra when starting the variable display of the upper operating port display section 33 or the lower operating port display section 34, or This is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb. At the start of one game round, based on each numerical information stored in the execution area AE, A determination as to whether or not it is valid is made.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, one is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory open counter C4.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 24a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is opened per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the high-frequency support becomes relatively high and low.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric-power-opening state in the motor-powered object opening lottery using the electric-powered object opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is opened when the electrification is released is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory is elected in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a minimum securing time (ie, that is, a minimum securing time after the one electric-power-use opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-power-use opening lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode) One display continuation time on the accessory display unit 35) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning will occur in the lower operation port 24 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will occur in the upper working port 23 than in the lower working port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning to the lower working port 24 is higher than in the upper working port 23. The probability of winning is increased. When a prize is generated in the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric utility opening state per unit time in the high frequency support mode compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of winning the electrification open state high in. In addition, a securing time secured after one electric-power-operated item opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-powered object opening lottery is performed (for example, the display of the special-effects display unit 35 based on a prize to the through gate 25 is performed). In the configuration where a plurality of types of variable display times are prepared, the setting is made such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. It may be. Furthermore, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, and shortening the securing time secured after the next electric auditors goods opening lottery is performed after one electric auditors goods opening lottery is performed. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one of the conditions for shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, or any combination of the conditions. .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and the game ball is
Alternatively, at the timing when the lower working port 24 is won, it is stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a hit / fail table (hit / hit information group) in a hit / hit table storage area 63a as a hit / hit information group storage means in the ROM 63. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the pass / fail tables for the low-probability mode (low-probability pass / fail information group) in FIG. 8A and the pass / fail table for the high-probability mode in FIG. Probability information group for probability). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as lottery modes in the winning / rejecting lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, the number of the random numbers as the jackpot result is two. In the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8B, the number of random numbers serving as the jackpot is twenty. Therefore, referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode in the lottery is more likely to result in a big hit than referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in the lottery.

  The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which results in the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which results in the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers as the jackpot result are arbitrary. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot in the low probability mode is only partially included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the result of the jackpot in the high probability mode. Or a configuration not included.

  In each lottery mode, a lottery result is a result other than the value of the random number that is a jackpot result, and the result of the loss does not serve as a trigger for shifting to the pass / fail lottery mode or the support mode.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb at the timing when the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is won.

  The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 63b as distribution information storage means in the ROM 63. As shown in FIG. 8, a distribution table for the upper working port in FIG. 8C and a distribution table for the lower working port in FIG. 8D are set as the distribution tables.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in the distribution table for the upper working port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0” to “29”, “0” to “14” are included in the 6R normal jackpot result. "15" to "29" correspond to the 6R probability change jackpot result.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8D, in the distribution table for the lower working port, among the jackpot type counters C2 of “0” to “29”, “0” to “14” are included in the 16R normal jackpot result. "15" to "29" correspond to the 16R probability change jackpot result.

  According to the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot result differs between the case where the jackpot is won with the prize in the upper working port 23 and the case where the jackpot is won with the prize in the lower working port 24. are doing. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the operating ports 23 and 24 where the gaming balls have won.

  When comparing the distribution table for the upper working port and the distribution table for the lower working port, the distribution table for the lower working port is more effective than the distribution table for the upper working port in a round game described later. The number of rounds is set to be large. As a result, it is possible to expect that a jackpot is won with the prize in the lower operating port 24 as a trigger.

  The 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result are the jackpot results in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The 6R probability change jackpot result and the 16R probability change jackpot result are the jackpot results in which after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

  The open / close execution mode is a mode in which a predetermined number of round games are performed. The round game means that a predetermined upper limit continuation period elapses and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the special winning opening 22a until one of the conditions is satisfied. This is a game in which the state in which 22a is opened continues. In each round game, the opening of the special winning opening 22a is performed only once, but the opening may be performed a plurality of times.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 51 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven and controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 seconds. . Then, in each round game, the upper limit continuation time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game is set. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that the winning of the upper limit number in one round game will occur in the special winning opening 22a.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb at the timing when the game ball has won the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of performing a variable display (or a variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment-response result in a gaming round in which a jackpot result is obtained. At a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 31 is started, a display for causing the player to think that the variable display state is likely to be the above-mentioned provision result. State. It should be noted that, specifically, the combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the activated lines is stopped and displayed.

  Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display, and a preview display for expecting the occurrence of a reach display and the occurrence of an assignment correspondence result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols in some of the symbol columns among the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, and displaying the remaining combinations in that state. A display state in which a symbol is fluctuated in the symbol row is included. Also, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen or , The combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variance display is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where a symbol is variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, or the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game cycle in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game time corresponding to the result of the departure, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Will be executed if

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 90. In this case, in the sound emission control device 90, the notice time is easily generated in the game time corresponding to the jackpot result, and the notice display with a low appearance rate is easily generated as compared to the game time corresponding to the out-of-game result. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 31.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 to determine the variation display time on the display units 33 and 34 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated by a timer interrupt process described later, and the value of the variation type counter CS is determined at the time of starting the variation display on the display units 33 and 34 and at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 31. Is obtained.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main Controller 60>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed for causing the MPU 62 in the main control device 60 to advance a game will be described. Note that, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 62 executes a main process started upon power-on and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. This process is started by the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 23a, and 24c is executed. Specifically, when a winning has occurred in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, the counter for three prize balls provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The three-prize-ball counter is for counting the number of times a three-prize-ball command for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls should be output. It should be noted that a winning in the upper operating port 23 and a winning in the lower operating port 24 can occur simultaneously within one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the processing of adding 1 to the three prize ball counters is not performed. It can be performed twice.

  When a prize has occurred in the general winning opening 21, the counter for ten prize balls provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The ten-prize-ball counter is for counting the number of times a ten-prize-ball command for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out ten game balls should be output.

  When a winning has occurred in the special winning opening 22a, the counter for fifteen prize balls provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The 15 prize ball counter is for counting the number of times that a 15 prize ball command for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out 15 game balls should be output.

  After executing the processing of step S101, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S102. In the following step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value.

  In a succeeding step S104, a winning process for the operating port is executed, and in a step S105, a winning process for the through is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends. In the prize winning process for the through executed in step S105, when a prize occurs in the through gate 25, the maximum number of stored bonuses stored in the electrical winning holding area 64c (for example, “4”) ), The value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric charge holding area 64c.

  The winning process for the operating port executed in step S104 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning processing for the operating port executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S201, it is determined whether or not a winning in the upper operating port 23 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the upper working port sensor 23a has been switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S201, the value stored in the first reserved number storage area NA of the first reserved area Ra is read out in step S202, and the first start-up stored in the first reserved area Ra is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA is less than “255”. As described above, the value “255” is the upper limit value at which the hold information can be stored in the first hold area Ra. If the first start pending ball count NA is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the main prize processing is terminated.

  If the first start-reserved ball count NA is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S203, and the first start-reserved ball count NA is incremented by one. In the following step S204, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are set to the first of the empty reservation areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first reservation area Ra. The information is stored in the reserved areas Ra1 to Ra255, that is, the reserved areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in the above step S203.

  In the following step S205, a first hold number increase command is set. The first hold number increase command is a command for specifying the timing at which the display control device 100 acquires the hold information corresponding to the winning in the upper operating port 23. The first hold number increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12) described later. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the first hold number increase command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  Here, a process in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 when receiving a command transmitted from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a command corresponding process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the first hold number increase command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S301: YES), the display control device 100 holds the command in the work RAM 104 in step S302. The first display-side reserved storage number laN1 is incremented by one. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 can specify the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra from the first display-side hold storage number laN1.

  In subsequent step S303, information that a winning has occurred in the upper operating port 23 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the same number as the number of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is displayed in the first hold number display area Ga after the winning in the upper operating port 23 occurs.

  Returning to the description of the winning operation for the operating port (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S201, it is determined in step S206 whether or not a winning has occurred in the lower operating port 24. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the lower working port sensor 24c has been switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal. If no prize has been generated in the lower operating port 24 of the game ball, the main prize processing is terminated.

  If the game ball has won the lower operating port 24, the value stored in the second reserved number storage area NB of the second reserved area Rb is read out in step S207, and the value is reserved in the second reserved area Rb. It is determined whether or not the stored second start-holding ball number NB is less than “255”. As described above, the value “255” is the upper limit value at which the hold information can be stored in the second hold area Rb. If the second start-reserved ball count NB is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the main winning processing is terminated.

  If the second start-reserved ball count NB is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S208, and the second start-reserved ball count NB is incremented by one. In the following step S209, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are stored in the first one of the empty reservation areas Rb1 to Rb255 of the second reservation area Rb. The reserved areas are stored in the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb255, that is, the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb255 corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in the step S208.

  In a succeeding step S209, a second holding number increase command is set, and the winning processing is ended. The second hold number increase command is a command for specifying the timing at which the display control device 100 acquires the hold information corresponding to the winning of the lower operating port 24. The second hold number increase command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12) described later. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the second hold number increase command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the second hold number increase command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S304: YES), the display control device 100 holds the command in the work RAM 104 in step S305. The second display-side reserved storage number lbN1 is incremented by one. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 can specify the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb from the second display-side hold storage number lbN1.

  In a succeeding step S306, information that a winning has occurred in the lower operation port 24 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the same number as the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second holding area Rb is displayed in the second hold number display area Gb after the winning of the lower operating port 24 occurs.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing in steps S401 to S407 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S409 and S410 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 70. In addition, when an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for a game round or a command corresponding to an effect for an open / close execution mode is set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In a succeeding step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to zero.

  In a succeeding step S403, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game number control process, the game control unit determines whether or not the game is correct, and performs setting of symbol variable display by the symbol display device 31 and display control of the display units 33 and 34. The details of the game round control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S404, a game state transition process is executed. By this game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition processing will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S405, a process for supporting the electric combination for driving and controlling the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is executed. In this electric role support processing, the electronic part release whether or not the electric part 24a is to be opened using the numerical information obtained from the electric part release counter C4 stored in the electric part holding area 64c of the RAM 64 is determined. In addition to performing the lottery, when the winning combination is in the open state, the opening and closing process of the electrical accessory 24a is executed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 35 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the open electrical lottery.

  Here, as described above, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 24a, and the transition to any of the support modes is performed in the game state transition processing. Be done. In this case, when the high-frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the high-frequency support mode is set. When the flag is not set to “1”, the low-frequency support mode is set.

  In the power handling support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, thereby determining whether or not the high frequency support mode is set. Then, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is opened when the electrification is in the open state is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. Set a longer open time. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, when the electric utility release state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs plural times, the next open state is started after one open state ends. Is set so that the closing time until is shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”.

  In a succeeding step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period is provided on condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply and the launch control device 80 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the launch handle 51. Once (for example, 0.6 sec), the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 81 is excited. Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S407, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 64. The occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 65, and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62, so that the power failure flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" and is erased in the next main processing. Flag.

  If the power failure flag is not set to “1”, it means that the last processing of a plurality of processings to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, in step S408, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached. That is, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal processing. That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S410, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 407 that the power outage flag is set to “1”, it means that the power supply has been interrupted, and the processing at the time of power interruption in step S411 and thereafter is executed. That is, in step S411, the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S412, and after the access to the RAM 64 is prohibited in step S413, the power is completely shut off and the process is terminated. Continues an infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

<Game round control process>
Next, the game turn control process executed in step S403 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a game round control process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In the game round control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the open / close execution mode. When the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game is executed without executing any of the processing after step S502, that is, the processing for starting the game in steps S503 to S505 and the processing for proceeding in the game in steps S506 to S511. The round control process ends. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started irrespective of whether or not a winning has occurred in the operating ports 23 and 24.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, in step S502, it is determined whether the display 33 for the upper working port or the display 34 for the lower working port is performing variable display, that is, one game is being played. It is determined whether or not.

  When the display section 33 for the upper working port or the display section 34 for the lower working port is not performing the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505. In the game repetition start process, first, in step S503, the values stored in the first reserved number storage area NA of the first reserved area Ra and the second reserved number storage area NB of the second reserved area Rb are read, Whether the first start reserved ball number NA reserved and stored in the first reserved area Ra and the second start reserved ball number NB reserved and stored in the second reserved area Rb are "0". Determine whether or not. When the first start-reserved ball count NA and the second start-reserved ball count NB are “0”, it means that the reservation information has not been acquired, and thus the game repetition control process is ended as it is.

  If one of the start-reserved ball counts NA and NB is not “0” out of the first start-reserved ball count NA and the second start-reserved ball count NB, the first ball in the reserved ball storage area 64a is determined in step S504. A data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area Ra or the data stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding sphere storing area 64a for the variable display is executed, and further proceeds to step S505. After performing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the display units 33 and 34 and the variation display on the symbol display device 31, the game round control process is ended.

  The data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a data setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S601, the value stored in the second reserved number storage area NB of the second reserved area Rb is read, and the second starting reserved ball count NB reserved and stored in the second reserved area Rb is obtained. It is determined whether it is "0". In the present embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is digested earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. More specifically, when the hold information is stored in each of the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, all the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is consumed, and then the first hold area is used. The reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra is digested.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the first start pending ball number NA is decremented by one in step S602. In subsequent step S603, data (each numerical information) is moved from the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra to the execution area AE.

  In the subsequent step S604, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first holding area Ra1 to the 255th holding area Ra255 of the first holding area Ra to the lower area side. The data in the first holding area Ra1 is shifted in such a manner that the data in the first holding area Ra1 is cleared and the n-th holding area → the (n-1) -th holding area.

  In the following step S605, a first hold information deletion command is set, and the data setting process ends. The first hold information deletion command is a command for specifying that the display control device 100 has deleted one hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. The first hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the first hold information deletion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the first hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S307: YES), the display control device 100 is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S308. The first display-side reserved storage number laN1 is decremented by one.

  In subsequent step S309, information for deleting one piece of hold information corresponding to the upper operation port 23 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the same number as the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is displayed in the first hold number display area Ga after one piece of hold information corresponding to the upper operation port 23 is deleted. .

  Returning to the description of the data setting process (FIG. 14), if a negative determination is made in step S601, the second start-reserved ball number NB is decremented by one in step S606. In the following step S607, data is moved from the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb to the execution area AE.

  In the subsequent step S608, a process of shifting the data in the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to 255th reserved areas Rb255 to the 255th reserved area Rb255 of the second reserved area Rb to the lower area side. While clearing the data in the first holding area Rb1, the data in the second holding area Rb is shifted in the order of the n-th holding area → the (n-1) th holding area.

  In step S609, a second hold information deletion command is set. The second hold information deletion command is a command for specifying that the display control apparatus 100 has deleted one hold information stored in the second hold area Rb. The second hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the second hold information deletion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the second hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S310: YES), the display control device 100 holds the command in the work RAM 104 in step S311. The second display-side reserved storage number lbN1 is subtracted by one.

  In subsequent step S312, information for erasing one hold information corresponding to the lower working port 24 is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the same number as the number of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb after erasing one hold information corresponding to the lower operation port 24 is displayed in the second hold number display area Gb. .

  Returning to the description of the data setting process (FIG. 14), after executing the process of step S609, "1" is set to the lower opening trigger flag of the RAM 64 in step S610, and the data setting process ends. The lower working port trigger flag is a flag for specifying that the game round has been started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the lower working port 24. As described above, in the present embodiment, the type determination processing is referred to at the time of a jackpot winning triggered by a prize at the upper operating port 23 and at the time of a jackpot winning triggered by a prize at the lower operating port 24. The sort table type is different. By determining whether or not “1” is set in the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines which of the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24, It becomes possible to specify whether or not the game round has been started with the prize winning of 24. Thus, when the jackpot is won, the main control device 60 determines which of the distribution table for the upper working port and the distribution table for the lower working port should be referred to in the type determination processing. Can be specified by the MPU 62.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 13), when the process of step S504 is executed, a change start process is executed in step S505. The change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S701, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. In a succeeding step S702, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode. As will be described in detail later, when the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode at the end of the open / close execution mode, “1” is set to the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. When the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the winning / rejecting lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and when the high probability mode flag is not set to “1” in the RAM 64, the winning / rejecting mode is set to the low probability mode. It becomes.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S701 is included in the value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / not-hitting table for the low probability mode in the ROM 63 in step S703. Is determined.

  If a negative determination is made in step S702, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S701 is included in the value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / non-hitting table for the high probability mode in the ROM 63 in step S704. Is determined.

  If a jackpot has been won in the processing of step S703 or the processing of step S704 (step S705: YES), the type determination processing is executed in step S706. The type determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the type determination processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S801, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for distribution determination, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. In the next step S802, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64. As described above, the lower working port trigger flag is a flag for specifying that the game round has been started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 triggered by winning of the lower working port 24. At the timing when the winning in the lower operating port 24 occurs, “1” is set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S801 described above is referred to in the distribution table for the upper working port in step S803, and the value of the 6R normal jackpot result and the 6R certain variable jackpot result is obtained. It is determined which of the jackpot results corresponds.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S801 is determined by referring to the distribution table for the lower working port in step S804, and the 16R normal jackpot result and the 16R certain variable jackpot. It is determined whether any of the jackpot results corresponds to the jackpot result.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 15), after executing the processing of step S706, a stop result setting processing for the big hit result is executed in step S707. Specifically, when the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the information of the pattern form to be stopped and displayed on the upper operating port display unit 33 in the game times related to the start of the current fluctuation is displayed. , From the stop result table for the first jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, and stores the specified information in the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, when the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the information of the pattern of the pattern stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display section 34 in the game time related to the start of the current fluctuation is stored in the ROM 63. The information is specified from the stop result table for the second jackpot result stored in advance in the RAM 64, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  In the stop result table for the first jackpot result and the stop result table for the second jackpot result, the type of the pattern of the pattern stopped and displayed on the upper working port display unit 33 or the lower working port display unit 34 is displayed. In step S707, the RAM 64 stores the information on the pattern form corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S706.

  In a succeeding step S708, a process corresponding to the processing result of the type determination process in the step S706 is executed. In the processing corresponding to the processing result of the type determination processing, processing of setting “1” to a flag corresponding to the type of the specified jackpot result is executed. Specifically, when it is specified that the result is the 6R normal jackpot result, “1” is set to the 6R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, and when it is specified that the result is the 16R normal jackpot result, the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set. When "1" is set and it is specified that the result is the 6R probability variable jackpot result, "1" is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, and when it is specified that the result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot of the RAM 64 is specified. Set the flag to "1".

  If a negative determination is made in step S705, stop result setting processing for a departure result is executed in step S709. Specifically, when the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the pattern of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the upper operating port display unit 33 in the game time related to the start of the change is described below. The information is specified from the stop result table for the deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display section 34 in the game time related to the start of the change is stored in the ROM 63. The information is specified from the stop result table for the departure result stored in advance in the RAM 64, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  When the processing of step S708 or the processing of step S709 is performed, a variable display time (variable display period) setting processing is performed in step S710. In this process, first, the value of the variation type counter CS is obtained. Next, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated on the display screen G in this game round. Specifically, when the game time related to the start of the current fluctuation is a jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Even when the result is out of range, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 63, and the fluctuation display is performed. The time is set in a variable display time counter provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The variable display time counter is a counter for specifying the variable display time of the current game at the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 63. The variable display time is set in a variable display time counter provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the reach generation variable display time table.

  In addition, the variation display time of the game times corresponding to the occurrence of the reach does not depend on the first start-reserved ball number NA and the second start-reserved ball number NB. For example, there is no setting such that the larger the number of the first start-reserved ball count NA and the second start-reserved ball count NB, the shorter the game display time fluctuation display time.

  In addition, the fluctuation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence time is the first start-holding ball number NA and the second starting-holding ball number NA until the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the second start-holding ball number NB reaches a predetermined number. (2) When the number of the number of start-reserved balls NB is set to be shorter each time the number reaches the specific number, and the number of the first start-reserved ball number NA and the number of the second start-reserved ball number NB exceeds the predetermined number, , The shortest fluctuation display time is set. The predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is performed for a long time. Specifically, the specific number is set to 20, 40, 60, and 80, and the predetermined number is set to 100. Until the next specific number or the predetermined number is reached, the variable display time does not change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the numbers of the first start-reserved ball count NA and the second start-reserved ball count NB are “1 to 19”, “20 to 39”, “40 to 59”, “ The variable display time is set to be shorter in the order of “60 to 79”, “80 to 99”, and “100 or more”. According to this configuration, it is possible to specify the approximate number of the first start-reserved balls NA and the number of the second start-reserved balls NB from the fluctuation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence.

  In addition, when the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the second start-holding ball number NB becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number, the shortest fluctuation display time is set thereafter. As described above, the predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is performed continuously for a long period of time. Here, if the configuration is such that the variable display time is shortened even after the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the second start-holding ball number NB exceeds the predetermined number, the actual setting may be made. Very little variable display time must be stored in the reach non-occurrence variable display time table of the ROM 63. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the second start-holding ball number NB is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the shortest variable display time is set thereafter, so that Is not required to be stored in the reach non-occurrence variable display time table of the ROM 63. As a result, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 from becoming unnecessarily large.

  In addition, in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, a reach time is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected as compared with a case where the number of hold information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. An occurrence fluctuation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not change according to the first start-holding ball number NA, the second starting-holding ball number NB, and the support mode. There may be. Further, the above-described configuration may be applied to a variable display time when a reach occurs.

  Further, in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode and the hold information that triggered the start of the current game round is the hold information stored in the second holding area Rb, the reach of non- The variable display time set when the generated and second start-reserved ball count NB is “0” is set when reach is not generated and the second start-reserved ball count NB is greater than “0” in the above situation. The variable display time is set to be longer than the variable display time, and shorter than the variable display time set when the reach occurs in the above situation.

  According to this configuration, in the above situation, the fluctuation display time set when the reach is not generated and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “0” is equal to the reach non-generated and the second start-reserved ball count NB in the above situation. Is set to be longer than the variable display time set when the number is larger than “0”, so that when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, It is possible to increase the probability that the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the start of the round. Thus, in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to reduce the probability of occurrence of a game round triggered by winning of the upper operating port 23.

  Further, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when no reach occurs in the above-described situation and the second starting hold ball count NB is “0” is set when the reach occurs in the above-described situation. It is set to be shorter than the variable display time. As mentioned above, if there is reach, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot, so you can expect big hits, but if there is no reach, you will not win big hits, so you can expect big hits Absent. Here, the variable display time set when the reach is not generated and the second starting hold ball number NB is “0” in the above situation is longer than the variable display time set when the reach is generated in the above situation. If the configuration is long, even if the jackpot is not won, the user feels frustrated that the time required until the end of the effect is long. In this regard, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when no reach occurs in the above situation and the second number of start-starting balls NB is “0” is set when the reach occurs in the above situation. Since it is set to be shorter than the variable display time, it is possible to prevent an effect that cannot be expected for the jackpot winning from occurring for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated that an effect that cannot be expected in the jackpot win occurs for a long time.

  As described above, the fluctuation display time of each game is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the number of hold information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is a parameter of the content of the other hold information, specifically, the information for the jackpot determination, the information for the type determination, and the information for the reach determination included in the other hold information as parameters. Determined without having to do it.

  After executing the processing of step S710, a variation command and a type command are set in step S711. The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained with reference to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the variable display time obtained with reference to the reach occurrence variable display time table. Even if the command for use does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound emission control device 90 can specify whether or not reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the fluctuation command includes information indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred.

  Further, the type command includes information on a game result. That is, the type command includes any one of the information of the 6R normal jackpot result, the information of the 6R probability variable jackpot result, the information of the 16R normal jackpot result, and the information of the 16R variable jackpot result as the game result information. It is.

  The variation command and the type command set in step S711 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). In the sound emission control device 90, based on the received type command, the type of the jackpot result is specified to be any one of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R positive variable jackpot result, the 16R normal variable jackpot result, and the 16R positive variable jackpot result. .

  If it is any of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot result, the 16R probability variable jackpot result, and the 16R probability variable jackpot result, a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, first, when the type of the jackpot result this time is the 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on one activated line L1 to L5. Is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of the even symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  When the type of the jackpot result of this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot result and the 16R probability variable jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of odd symbols is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is used. Determined as the information of the stop result. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  Also, if the current game result is a miss result, a miss symbol determination process is executed. Specifically, based on the content of the fluctuation command, it is determined whether or not the game time is related to the occurrence of the missed reach display, and if the game time is related to the occurrence of the missed reach display, one active line is determined. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the combination type of the out-of-reach reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined. In addition, when it is not the game time related to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the out-of-reach reach symbol combination is also stopped. The information corresponding to the stop result that is not displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  Next, based on the received command for change and the type command, the effect pattern of the game times related to the start of the change is determined. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90 in advance, the effect continuation period corresponding to the fluctuation command and the type command received this time is selected, and the effect Select the content. The MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 in the game time related to the start of the change in accordance with the determined effect pattern.

  Next, the display control device 100 displays a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of the jackpot result or the symbol determination processing for departure, and a pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the game time related to the start of the change. Send to

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for performing the effect for the game round relating to the start of the change on the symbol display device 31 based on the received stop result command and the pattern command. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time a predetermined image update timing is set according to the table (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 31, the effect for the game round is executed in accordance with the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally displayed as a stop. Is done.

  After the process of step S711 is performed, the variation display of the picture is started on one of the display units 33 and 34 in step S712, and then the variation start process ends. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the variation display of the pattern is started on the upper operating port display unit 33, and “1” is set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64. Is set, the display of the change of the picture is started on the display 34 for the lower working port.

  Returning to the description of the game operation control process (FIG. 13), when the upper operation port display unit 33 or the lower operation port display unit 34 is performing variable display, the variable display time of the game operation elapses in step S506. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”.

  If the fluctuation display time of the game has not elapsed, a fluctuation display process is executed in step S507. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the display mode on the upper operating port display unit 33 is changed to “1” in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64. If it is set, the display mode on the lower working port display section 34 is changed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S506, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S508. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the information stored in the RAM 64 in the processing of step S707 or step S709 is specified, and the picture pattern corresponding to the information is specified. Is displayed on the upper operating port display section 33 so as to be displayed on the upper operating port display section 33. On the other hand, if "1" is set in the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of step S707 or step S709 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is set to the lower operation mode. The display of the lower working port display unit 34 is controlled to be displayed on the mouth display unit 34.

  In a succeeding step S509, a fluctuation end command is set. The fluctuation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Upon receiving the fluctuation end command, the display control device 100 causes the final stop symbol combination in the game round to be definitely displayed (final stop display).

  When the process of step S509 is performed, it is determined in step S510 whether or not “1” is set in the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the present game round control process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S511.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, a game state transition process executed in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the open / close execution mode. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not the timing at which the variable display of the pattern on the upper operating port display unit 33 or the lower operating port display unit 34 for one game has been completed. If it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended, the present game state transition processing ends.

If it is the timing at which the variable display has been completed, it is determined in step S903 whether or not the result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64. As described above, when a big hit is won in response to the winning in the upper operating port 23, “1” is set to one of the 6R normal big hit flag and the 6R certain variable big hit flag. In addition, when the jackpot is won with the winning in the lower operation port 24, “1” is set to one of the 16R normal jackpot flag and the 16R certain variable jackpot flag. If it does not correspond to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the present game state shift processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, the values stored in the first reserved number storage area NA of the first reserved area Ra and the second reserved number storage area NB of the second reserved area Rb are read in step S904, Whether the first start reserved ball number NA reserved and stored in the first reserved area Ra and the second start reserved ball number NB reserved and stored in the second reserved area Rb are "0". It is determined whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, it is determined in step S905 whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal big hit flag or the 6R certain variable big hit flag in the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, “6” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S906. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S906, "1000" is set as the opening standby period in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the opening waiting period is 2 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, “16” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S907, and “16” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. 1000 "is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S904, a jackpot winning number identification process is executed in step S908. The jackpot winning number specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot winning number specifying process refers to how much of the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the holding information for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. This is a process for specifying. In the present embodiment, if the hold information to be determined whether to add the number of rounds includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, according to the number of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning The number of rounds is added. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the jackpot winning number specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. As described above, when the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the low probability mode is set. When the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the high probability mode is set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the value stored in the first reserved number storage area NA of the first reserved area Ra is read out in step S1002, and the first start reserved and stored in the first reserved area Ra. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the process of specifying the number of hit jackpots ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, a first jackpot information specifying process is executed in step S1003. The first jackpot information specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The first jackpot information specifying process is a process for executing a success / failure determination process of the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds stored in the first hold area Ra. . FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot information specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1101, the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The first determination processing number counter is determined by the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra for which the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines whether or not to add the number of rounds. This is a counter for specifying the reserved areas Ra1 to Ra255 where the processing is performed. The initial value of the first determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S1102, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 in the first holding area Ra is grasped. In the present embodiment, the values of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 correspond to the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra. Specifically, when the first determination processing number counter is “1”, the first reservation area Ra1 of the first reservation area Ra corresponds, and when the first determination processing number counter is “255”. , The 255th reserved area Ra255 of the first reserved area Ra corresponds. In step S1102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the values of the first determination processing number counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1103, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64. The 6R normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift to the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is the 6R normal jackpot result. The jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift to the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is a 16R normal jackpot result.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not “1” is set in the on-hold probable change big hit flag of the RAM 64. The hold-in-probability change jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs the hit / fail judgment processing with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1104, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the jackpot winning, with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. I do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the jackpot winning, with reference to the hit / failure table for the high probability mode. I do.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1103, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not “1” is set in the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64. The on-hold normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs the rejection determination process with reference to the rejection table for the low probability mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1107, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the jackpot winning, with reference to the hit / failure table for the high probability mode. I do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the jackpot winning by referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. I do.

  If a jackpot has been won in the processing in step S1105, the processing in step S1106, the processing in step S1108, or the processing in step S1109 (step S1110: YES), the first data provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1111. One is added to the jackpot number counter. The first jackpot number counter is configured to determine whether or not to add the number of rounds in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The hold information stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra targeted for the determination process. This is a counter for specifying how much of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included therein.

  In a succeeding step S1112, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, first, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the value of the first determination process number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped. Next, with reference to the distribution table for the upper working port, it is specified which of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped above corresponds to the jackpot result among the 6R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variable jackpot result. I do.

  Here, in the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds in the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, in order to distinguish from the case of the 6R normal jackpot result or the 6R sure-change jackpot result in the success / failure determination process of the hold information which triggers the start of the game round. If the result is a normal jackpot result, it is expressed as a 6R on-hold jackpot result on hold, and if the result of the 6R sure-change jackpot result is determined in the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds, the result is 6R on-hold jackpot result on hold. To express.

  In the process of step S1112, if the pending 6R normal jackpot result is obtained (step S1113: YES), "1" is set only in the 6R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1114, or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set. Is set to "1", the 6R certain jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1", and the 16R certain jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". Is set or not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1114, “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag and the in-hold probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1115, or “16” in the 16R ordinary jackpot flag and the in-hold probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. It is determined whether "1" is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1115, the in-reservation probability-change jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1116.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1115, “1” is set in the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 in step S1117. The case in which a negative determination is made in step S1115 is a situation in which "1" is set only in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1113, whether "1" is set only in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1118 or "1" is set only in the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is determined. It is determined whether "1" is set to the 6R normal jackpot flag and the probable variable jackpot flag in pending or "1" is set to the 16R regular jackpot flag and the probable variable jackpot flag in reserved in the RAM 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S1118, “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag and pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 in step S1119, or “16R probability variable jackpot flag and pending ordinary jackpot flag in the RAM 64 are set to“ 1 ”. It is determined whether "1" is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1119, the pending normal big hit flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1120.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1119, “1” is set to the in-hold probable change big hit flag in the RAM 64 in step S1121. The case where a negative determination is made in step S1119 is a situation in which “1” is set only in the 6R normal big hit flag or the 16R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1110, an affirmative determination is made in step S1114, a process in step S1116 is performed, a process in step S1117 is performed, if a positive determination is made in step S1118, the process in step S1120 is performed. When the process is executed or when the process of step S1121 is executed, whether the value of the first determination process number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1122 is the same as the first start holding ball number NA is determined. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1122, the processing of steps S1101 to S1121 is executed again. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1122, the first jackpot information specifying process ends.

  According to this configuration, when the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra, they are stored in the first holding area Ra. All pending information is subject to a process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily increase the number of rounds.

  According to this configuration, in the hold information acquired until the game round corresponding to the jackpot win ends, the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds is set. Here, assuming that the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds is set from the hold information acquired until the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is started, The hold information acquired after the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is started is not a target of the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to continuously perform the firing operation from the start to the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this regard, according to this configuration, the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds from the hold information acquired until the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is set is set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to continuously perform the firing operation even while the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is being performed.

  Returning to the description of the jackpot winning number specifying process (FIG. 18), if a negative determination is made in step S1001, the value stored in the second reserved number storage area NB of the second reserved area Rb in step S1004 is read out. It is determined whether or not the second starting reserved ball count NB retained and stored in the second reserved area Rb is larger than “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the process of specifying the number of hit jackpots ends.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, a second jackpot information specifying process is executed in step S1005. The second jackpot information specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The second jackpot hold information specifying process is a process for executing a hit / fail determination process of the hold information to be subjected to the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds stored in the second hold area Rb. is there. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second jackpot information specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1201, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The second determination process number counter is determined by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb, which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. This is a counter for specifying the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb254 where the processing is performed. The initial value of the second determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S1202, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 in the second holding area Rb is grasped. In the present embodiment, the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 corresponds to the holding areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second holding area Rb. Specifically, when the second determination processing number counter is “1”, the first reservation area Rb1 of the second reservation area Rb corresponds, and when the second determination processing number counter is “254”. 254th reserved area Ra254 of the second reserved area Rb. In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped.

  Steps S1203 to S1209 are the same as steps S1103 to S1109.

  If a jackpot has been won in the processing in step S1205, the processing in step S1206, the processing in step S1208, or the processing in step S1209 (step S1210: YES), the information is provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1211. The second jackpot number counter is incremented by one. The second jackpot number counter is configured to determine whether the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 should add the number of rounds or not to the hold information stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second hold area Rb. This is a counter for specifying how much of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included therein.

  If the processing in step S1211 has been performed, type determination processing is performed in step S1212. In the type determination processing, first, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped. Next, referring to the distribution table for the lower working port, it is specified which of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped above corresponds to the jackpot result among the 16R normal jackpot result and the 16R certain variable jackpot result. I do.

  Here, in order to discriminate from the case of a 16R normal jackpot result or a 16R probability-change jackpot result in the success / failure determination process of the hold information which is a trigger for starting the game round, in the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the 16R normal jackpot is determined. When the jackpot result is obtained, it is expressed that the reserved 16R regular jackpot result is obtained, and in the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, when the 16R certain variable jackpot result is obtained, the 16R certain variable jackpot result on hold is obtained. Express.

  In the process of step S1212, if the 16R normal jackpot on hold result is obtained (step S1213: YES), “1” is set only in the 6R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1214, or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set. Is set to "1", the 6R certain jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1", and the 16R certain jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". Is set or not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1214, then in step S1215, "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag and the in-hold probable variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, or the "16R normal jackpot flag and the in-reserved probable variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are set to" 1 ". It is determined whether "1" is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, the in-reservation probability-change jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1216.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1215, “1” is set in the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 in step S1217. The case in which a negative determination is made in step S1215 is a situation in which "1" is set only in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1213, it is determined in step S1218 whether only the 6R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1", or whether only the 16R probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". It is determined whether "1" is set to the 6R normal jackpot flag and the probable variable jackpot flag in pending or "1" is set to the 16R regular jackpot flag and the probable variable jackpot flag in reserved in the RAM 64.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1218, “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag and pending normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S1219, or “1R” is set in the 16R variable jackpot flag and pending normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64. It is determined whether "1" is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1219, the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1220.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1219, “1” is set to the on-hold probable change big hit flag in the RAM 64 in step S1221. The case where a negative determination is made in step S1219 is a situation in which “1” is set only in the 6R normal big hit flag or the 16R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64.

  According to the present embodiment, when the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the result of the 6R certain-variable jackpot on hold or the result of the 16R certain-variable jackpot on hold is determined, the holding of the RAM 64 is performed. In a situation where the inside-probable variable jackpot flag is set to “1” and the on-hold probable variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the pending 6R regular jackpot result or the reserved 16R regular jackpot result results, the RAM 64 The pending change jackpot flag is cleared to “0”. In addition, in a situation where the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the pending 6R regular jackpot result or the reserved 16R regular jackpot result is obtained, the pending regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to In a situation where “1” is set and the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if a pending 6R probability variable jackpot result or a 16R reliable variable jackpot result in the pending status is reached, the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is displayed. Is cleared to "0". According to this configuration, the success / failure determination processing of the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed by the success / failure lottery that is set when the suspension information actually triggers the start of the game round. This can be performed by referring to the success / failure table corresponding to the mode. As a result, the jackpot winning probability in the success / failure determination process performed in the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds and the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds are actually the game times. It is possible to prevent a difference from the jackpot winning probability in the hit determination processing performed when the start is triggered.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1210, a positive determination is made in step S1214, a process in step S1216 is performed, a process in step S1217 is performed, if a positive determination is made in step S1218, the process in step S1220 is performed. When the process has been executed or when the process of step S1221 has been executed, the value of the second determination process number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1222 is the same as the second start-reserved ball number NB-1. It is determined whether the value is a value. If a negative determination is made in step S1222, the processing of steps S1201 to S1221 is executed again. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, the second jackpot information specifying process ends.

  According to this configuration, when the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are the second holding area Rb, the holding stored in the second holding area Rb. Among the pieces of information, one permission information is left, and the remaining / non-reservation information is subjected to hit / fail determination processing. Although the details will be described later, the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is cleared to “0” after the success / failure determination process is performed. Here, assuming that all the pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb are to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds, the number of games to be executed after the end of the open / close execution mode is There is a possibility that the winning of the upper working port 23 may be triggered. As described above, in the event that a jackpot is won with the prize winning in the upper operating port 23, the number of rounds becomes 6R. In this regard, according to this configuration, if the second holding area Rb is to be subjected to the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, one piece of holding information stored in the second holding area Rb is used. In the state where the information is left, the appropriateness determination processing is performed on the other hold information. This makes it possible to start a game round triggered by a prize in the lower operation port 24 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  According to the present embodiment, when the mode is the low-probability mode, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are set to the first holding area Ra, and the high-probability mode is set. In the case of the mode, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are set in the second holding area Rb. Here, in the case of the low probability mode, there is a possibility that the number of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is larger than the number of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb. When the mode is high and the mode is the high probability mode, the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is likely to be larger than the number of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. . Therefore, according to this configuration, the holding areas Ra and Rb on the side where the number of stored holding information is likely to be large are set as targets of the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds. It is possible to easily generate a situation where numbers are easily added.

  Further, as described above, the number of rounds of the round game given at the time of the jackpot winning triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is the hold number stored in the first hold area Ra. It is larger than the number of rounds of the round game given at the time of the jackpot winning triggered by the information. Therefore, when the mode is the low probability mode, the reservation areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are set to the first reservation area Ra. By setting the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the processing of determining whether or not to add the second area Rb, a jackpot has been won in the high probability mode. Can be granted.

  According to the present embodiment, even if the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb in the low probability mode, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is targeted. The process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is not performed. Further, in the high probability mode, even if the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra, the number of rounds for the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is added. No determination processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, one of the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds according to the type of the current winning / failure lottery mode is set. Thus, it is possible to make the types of the operating ports 23 and 24 that the gaming ball wants to win according to the type of the current winning / failure lottery mode different.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 17), after executing the processing of step S908, the special round number setting processing is executed in step S909. The special round number setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The special round number setting process is a process performed to set the number of rounds. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special round number setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether the first determination processing number counter and the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are “0”.
When an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal big hit flag or 6R certain variable big hit flag in the RAM 64.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set to "6" in step S1303, and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set to "6". 1000 "is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1302, "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1304, and "16" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. 1000 "is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1305 whether the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0". As described above, the first jackpot number counter is stored in the reserved areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first reserved area Ra for which the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines whether or not to add the number of rounds. This is a counter for specifying how many pieces of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win are included in the held hold information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1306 whether "1" is set in the 6R normal big hit flag or the 6R certain variable big hit flag in the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, in step S1307, the number of jackpots won is multiplied by 6 to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, and a value obtained by adding "6" to the value is set. "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The number of jackpot winnings is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1306, the winning number is multiplied by six to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1308, and a value obtained by adding "16" to the value is set. "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The number of jackpot winnings is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  When the processing in step S1307 or the processing in step S1308 is performed, the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1309.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1310 whether the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0". As described above, the second jackpot number counter is stored in the holding areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second holding area Rb which is a target of the determination processing whether to add the number of rounds in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. This is a counter for specifying how many pieces of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win are included in the held hold information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1310, it is determined in step S1311 whether or not “1” is set in the 6R ordinary big hit flag or the 6R certain variable big hit flag in the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, the winning number is multiplied by 16 to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1312, and a value obtained by adding "6" to the value is set. "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The big hit number is the value set in the second big hit number counter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1311, the number of jackpots won is multiplied by 16 to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1313, and a value obtained by adding "16" to the value is set. "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The big hit number is the value set in the second big hit number counter.

  When the processing of step S1312 or the processing of step S1313 is performed, the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1314.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1310, the processing in steps S1315 to S1317 is performed, and the special round number setting processing ends. The processing in steps S1315 to S1317 is similar to the processing in steps S1302 to S1304.

  According to this embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds, the number of rounds is added. This makes it possible to expect that the number of rounds will be added when a jackpot is won. Further, according to the present embodiment, when the holding areas Ra and Rb subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are the first holding areas Ra, in the above-described determination processing, the 6R normal jackpot in the holding is performed. The value obtained by multiplying the result or the number of the pending information that resulted in the 6R in-change 6R jackpot result by 6 is added to the round number. Further, when the holding areas Ra and Rb subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds are the second holding areas Rb, in the above-described determination processing, the on-hold 16R normal jackpot result or the on-hold 16R certain variable jackpot is obtained. A value obtained by multiplying the number of the resulting pending information by 16 is added to the number of rounds. With this, in the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, when the hold information is a jackpot, the hold information is given when the start of the game round is actually triggered. The same number of rounds as the number of rounds can be added.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 17), when the process of step S909 is executed, the first determination process number counter and the second determination process number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S910 It is determined whether it is "0". If the first determination processing number counter and the second determination processing number counter are “0”, it means that the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds has not been performed. Is not executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S910, a suspension information handling process is executed in step S911. The suspension information handling process will be described with reference to FIG. The hold information handling process is a process for clearing the hold information targeted for the determination process to “0” after the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is performed. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the hold information correspondence processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the holding areas Ra and Rb storing the holding information targeted for the processing of determining whether to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra. Specifically, it is determined whether the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the first start pending ball count NA is cleared to "0" in step S1402. In the following step S1403, the first hold area Ra is cleared to "0". As a result, all the hold information (in this case, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra) for which the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is performed is cleared to “0”.

  In the following step S1404, a third hold information deletion command is set. The third hold information deletion command is used to specify the timing at which the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra held and stored in the work RAM 104 by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is cleared to “0”. Command. The third hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the third hold information deletion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the third hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S313: YES), the display control device 100 holds the command in the work RAM 104 in step S314. The first display-side reserved storage number laN1 is cleared to "0".

  In subsequent step S315, information for stopping the display of the first reserved number display area Ga is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the number corresponding to the number of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is not displayed in the first hold number display area Ga.

  Returning to the description of the pending information processing (FIG. 22), when the processing of step S1404 is executed, the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1405.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, "1" is set to the second starting suspended ball count NB in step S1406. In the following step S1407, "0" is cleared to the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb254 which are the targets of the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds in the second reserved area Rb. Specifically, with reference to the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, the reservation area Rb2 higher than the reservation areas Rb1 to Rb254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter. Clear the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb254 other than .about.Rb255 to "0". More specifically, for example, when the second determination processing number counter is “1”, the first reservation area Rb1 of the second reservation area Rb is cleared to “0”, and the second determination processing number counter is “254”. In this case, the first hold area Rb1 to the 254th hold area Rb254 of the second hold area Rb are cleared to “0”.

  In step S1408, the hold information that has not been subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is shifted to the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb.

  In the following step S1409, a fourth hold information deletion command is set. The fourth hold information deletion command is used to specify the timing at which the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb held and stored in the work RAM 104 by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is set to “1”. Command. The fourth hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the fourth hold information deletion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the display control device 100 receives the fourth hold information deletion command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S316: YES), the display control device 100 holds the command in the work RAM 104 in step S317. "1" is set to the second display side reserved storage number lbN1.

  In subsequent step S318, information for setting the display of the second hold number display area Gb to “1” is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, “1” is displayed in the second hold number display area Gb in accordance with the number of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb.

  Returning to the description of the pending information processing (FIG. 22), when the processing of step S1409 is executed, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” in step S1410, This suspension information handling process ends.

  According to the present embodiment, in the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, only the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is not cleared to “0”, but the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is cleared. The pending information that is not stored is also cleared to “0”. Here, if the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is configured so that only the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is cleared to “0”, it is determined whether or not to add the number of rounds The player specifies that the result of the success / failure of the hold information that has not been cleared to “0” in the hold information to be processed is an out-of-order result. In this case, it is necessary to digest the game times that have determined that the success / failure result is a departure result. In this regard, according to the present configuration, regardless of the success / failure result of the hold information for which the round number is to be determined, whether or not the round number is to be determined is determined. All information is cleared to "0". As a result, the player is specified that the result of the success / failure of the hold information that has not been cleared to “0” in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is an outlier, This makes it possible to prevent the player from having to digest the game times that have determined that the success / failure result is a departure result.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 17), when the processing of step S906 is executed, when the processing of step S907 is executed, when an affirmative determination is made in step S910, or when the processing of step S911 is executed, In step S912, an opening command is set, and the game state transition processing ends. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect setting process for the open / close execution mode. According to the set effect pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

  The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process. The display control device 100 reads a data table from the program ROM 103 based on the received opening / closing execution mode command and performs the present opening / closing execution mode effect on the symbol display device 31, and determines a data table in advance according to the data table. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 every time the image update timing comes (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thus, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S901, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S913. In the special winning opening opening and closing process, when the special winning opening 22a is closed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is equal to or more than “1” and the timer provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 On condition that the counter T is “0”, the variable winning device 22 is driven to open the special winning opening 22a. In the timer counter T, numerical information for the opening time of the special winning opening 22a, numerical information for the opening standby time until the variable winning device 22 changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently to the open state again, and the like. Set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started.

  When the special winning opening 22a is open, the predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 22a (the timer counter T is "0"), or a predetermined number of game balls have won. In this case, the driving state of the variable winning device 22 is stopped, and the special winning opening 22a is closed. After executing the processing for closing the special winning opening 22a, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S914, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. When the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the present game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If the value of the round counter RC is “0”, it is determined in step S915 whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. When the timer counter T is not “0”, the present game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

  If the timer counter T is “0”, a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is performed in step S916. The shift processing at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode, which is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or the pending probability variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the shift processing at the end of the main open / close execution mode is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1502, the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in step S1503, and the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in the subsequent step S1504, and the main open / close operation is performed. The transition processing at the end of the mode ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1505 whether the high-probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, the shift processing at the end of the main open / close execution mode is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the high-probability mode flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1506, and the high-frequency support flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1507. The time transition process ends.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 17), when the processing of step S916 is executed, various flags are cleared to "0" in step S917, and the game state transition processing ends. Specifically, among the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R regular jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the pending regular jackpot flag, and the flag within the pending probability variable jackpot flag, the flag in which “1” is set is set. Clear "0".

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the winning / non-winning determination process is performed on the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds. In the case of, the number of rounds is added according to the number of the winning jackpots. This makes it possible to expect that the number of rounds will be added when the jackpot results.

  When the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra, all the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra is round. This is a target of the determination process of whether to add the number. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily increase the number of rounds.

  If the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds are the second holding area Rb, one of the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb Is performed on the other hold information while leaving the hold information. Here, when the type of the jackpot result this time is the 16R sure-change jackpot result, all of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds. With such a configuration, the game times executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode may be triggered by the winning of the upper operation port 23. As described above, in the event that a jackpot is won with the prize winning in the upper operating port 23, the number of rounds becomes 6R. In this regard, according to this configuration, if the second holding area Rb is to be subjected to the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, one piece of holding information stored in the second holding area Rb is used. In the state where the information is left, the appropriateness determination processing is performed on the other hold information. This makes it possible to start a game round triggered by a prize in the lower operation port 24 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the holding areas Ra and Rb subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are the first holding area Ra, in the above-described determination processing, the 6R normal jackpot result on hold or the 6R certain variable jackpot result on hold is used. A value obtained by multiplying the number of pending information by six times is added to the number of rounds. Further, when the holding areas Ra and Rb subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds are the second holding areas Rb, in the above-described determination processing, the on-hold 16R normal jackpot result or the on-hold 16R certain variable jackpot is obtained. A value obtained by multiplying the number of the resulting pending information by 16 is added to the number of rounds. With this, in the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, when the hold information is a jackpot, the hold information is given when the start of the game round is actually triggered. The same number of rounds as the number of rounds can be added.

  In the case of the low probability mode, the reservation areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are set in the first reservation area Ra. Are set as the second holding areas Rb, which are to be subjected to the processing of determining whether or not to add. Here, in the case of the low probability mode, there is a possibility that the number of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is larger than the number of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb. When the mode is high and the mode is the high probability mode, the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is likely to be larger than the number of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. . Therefore, according to this configuration, the holding areas Ra and Rb on the side where the number of stored holding information is likely to be large are set as targets of the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds. It is possible to easily generate a situation where numbers are easily added. In addition, the number of rounds of the round game to be awarded at the time of the jackpot winning triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is triggered by the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. It is larger than the number of rounds of the round game given at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, when the mode is the low probability mode, the reservation areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds are set to the first reservation area Ra. By setting the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the processing of determining whether or not to add the second area Rb, a jackpot has been won in the high probability mode. Can be granted.

  In the low probability mode, even if the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb, whether to add the number of rounds for the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is determined. Is not determined. Further, in the high probability mode, even if the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra, the number of rounds for the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is added. No determination processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, one of the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds according to the type of the current winning / failure lottery mode is set. Thus, it is possible to make the types of the operating ports 23 and 24 that the gaming ball wants to win according to the type of the current winning / failure lottery mode different.

  When the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the pending 6R probable jackpot result or the 16R probable jackpot result on the hold becomes “1” in the pending jackpot flag of the RAM 64, Is set and "1" is set in the pending jackpot variable jackpot flag in the RAM 64, and if the result of the 6R regular jackpot result in the reservation or the 16R regular jackpot result in the reserved key is "1", the flag of the jackpot in the RAM 64 is changed to " "0" is cleared. In addition, in a situation where the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the pending 6R regular jackpot result or the reserved 16R regular jackpot result is obtained, the pending regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to In a situation where “1” is set and the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if a pending 6R probability variable jackpot result or a 16R reliable variable jackpot result in the pending status is reached, the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is displayed. Is cleared to "0". According to this configuration, the success / failure determination processing of the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed by the success / failure lottery that is set when the suspension information actually triggers the start of the game round. This can be performed by referring to the success / failure table corresponding to the mode. As a result, the jackpot winning probability in the success / failure determination process performed in the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds and the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds are actually the game times. It is possible to prevent a difference from the jackpot winning probability in the hit determination processing performed when the start is triggered.

  In the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, not only the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is cleared to “0”, but also the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot win is set to “0”. Is cleared. Here, if the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is configured so that only the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is cleared to “0”, it is determined whether or not to add the number of rounds The player specifies that the result of the success / failure of the hold information that has not been cleared to “0” in the hold information to be processed is an out-of-order result. In this case, it is necessary to digest the game times that have determined that the success / failure result is a departure result. In this regard, according to the present configuration, regardless of the success / failure result of the hold information for which the round number is to be determined, whether or not the round number is to be determined is determined. All information is cleared to "0". As a result, the player is specified that the result of the success / failure of the hold information that has not been cleared to “0” in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is an outlier, This makes it possible to prevent the player from having to digest the game times that have determined that the success / failure result is a departure result.

  In the hold information acquired until the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning, the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds is set. Here, assuming that the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds is set from the hold information acquired until the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is started, The hold information acquired after the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is started is not a target of the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to continuously perform the firing operation from the start to the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this regard, according to this configuration, the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds from the hold information acquired until the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is set is set. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to continuously perform the firing operation even while the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is being performed.

  The variation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence time is the first start-reserved ball number NA and the second start-up ball number NA until the first start-reserved ball number NA and the second start-reserved ball number NB reach a predetermined number. Each time the number of reserved balls NB reaches a specific number, the number is set to be shorter. When the number of first start reserved balls NA and the number of second start reserved balls NB is equal to or more than the predetermined number, Set to a short variable display time. The predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is performed for a long time. Specifically, the specific number is set to 20, 40, 60, and 80, and the predetermined number is set to 100. Until the next specific number or the predetermined number is reached, the variable display time does not change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the numbers of the first start-reserved ball count NA and the second start-reserved ball count NB are “1 to 19”, “20 to 39”, “40 to 59”, “ The variable display time is set to be shorter in the order of “60 to 79”, “80 to 99”, and “100 or more”. According to this configuration, it is possible to specify the approximate number of the first start-reserved balls NA and the number of the second start-reserved balls NB from the fluctuation display time of the game times corresponding to the non-reach occurrence. In addition, when the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the second start-holding ball number NB becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number, the shortest fluctuation display time is set thereafter. The predetermined number is set to a number that is difficult to reach even if the firing operation is performed for a long time. Here, if the configuration is such that the variable display time is shortened even after the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the second start-holding ball number NB exceeds the predetermined number, the actual setting may be made. Very little variable display time must be stored in the reach non-occurrence variable display time table of the ROM 63. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the number of the first start-holding ball number NA and the second start-holding ball number NB is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the shortest variable display time is set thereafter, so that Is not required to be stored in the reach non-occurrence variable display time table of the ROM 63. As a result, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 from becoming unnecessarily large.

  In a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode and the hold information that triggered the start of the current game round is the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb, no reach occurs in the game round and The fluctuation display time set when the second start-reserved ball count NB is “0” is the fluctuation set when no reach occurs and the second start-reserved ball count NB is larger than “0” in the above situation. It is set so as to be longer than the display time and shorter than the variable display time set when the reach occurs in the above situation. According to this configuration, in the above situation, the fluctuation display time set when the reach is not generated and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “0” is equal to the reach non-generated and the second start-reserved ball count NB in the above situation. Is set to be longer than the variable display time set when the number is larger than “0”, so that when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, It is possible to increase the probability that the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the start of the round. Thus, in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to reduce the probability of occurrence of a game round triggered by winning of the upper operating port 23. Further, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when no reach occurs in the above situation and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “0” is set when the reach occurs in the above situation. It is set to be shorter than the variable display time. As mentioned above, if there is reach, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot, so you can expect big hits, but if there is no reach, you will not win big hits, so you can expect big hits Absent. Here, the variable display time set when the reach is not generated and the second starting hold ball number NB is “0” in the above situation is longer than the variable display time set when the reach is generated in the above situation. If the configuration is long, even if the jackpot is not won, the user feels frustrated that the time required until the end of the effect is long. In this regard, according to this configuration, the variable display time set when no reach occurs in the above situation and the second number of start-starting balls NB is “0” is set when the reach occurs in the above situation. Since it is set to be shorter than the variable display time, it is possible to prevent an effect that cannot be expected for the jackpot winning from occurring for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated that an effect that cannot be expected in the jackpot win occurs for a long time.

  Up to 255 pieces of hold information can be stored in each of the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb. Here, if the number that can be held and stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is set to a number that can be easily reached, the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 There is a possibility that a situation in which the holding information cannot be stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb may occur more frequently even though a winning has occurred. In this regard, according to this configuration, the number of items that can be held in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is set to 255. It is unlikely that they can be obtained. As a result, when a prize occurs in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24, a situation occurs in which the hold information cannot be stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb. The frequency can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for determining whether to add the number of rounds. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition process executed in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 according to the second embodiment.

  First, the processing of steps S1601 to S1607 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S907. If a negative determination is made in step S1604, a jackpot winning number identification process is executed in step S1608. The jackpot winning number specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a jackpot winning number specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, the processing of steps S1701 to S1705 is the same as the processing of steps S1001 to S1005. When the process of step S1703 or the process of step S1705 is performed, the first jackpot number counter and the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1706 are “0”. It is determined whether or not. The first jackpot number counter is the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra for which the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines whether or not to add the number of rounds. Is a counter for specifying how much of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in. In addition, the second jackpot number counter is stored in the holding areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second holding area Rb which is a target of the determination processing whether to add the number of rounds in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. This is a counter for specifying how much the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, this jackpot winning number identification processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, the first addition lottery table is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 in step S1708. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1707, the second addition lottery table is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 in step S1709.

  The first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table, the result of the addition or non-addition and the numerical range of the lottery counter are set in one-to-one correspondence. The lottery counter is a counter used for specifying the lottery result of whether or not to add the number of rounds. For example, the counter is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, “0” is set. ". FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first addition lottery table, and FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second addition lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in the case of the first addition lottery table, when the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1”, the probability of the addition winning is set to 50%. When the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "2", the probability of winning the addition is set to 60%, and the probability of the addition winning is set in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. When the first jackpot number counter is "3", the probability of winning is set to 80%. When the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "4" or more, the addition is performed. The probability of winning is set to 90%.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, in the case of the second addition lottery table, when the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1”, the probability of the addition winning is set to 70%. When the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “2”, the probability of the addition winning is set to 80%, and is provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. When the second jackpot number counter is "3", the probability of the addition winning is set to 90%. When the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "4" or more, the addition is performed. The probability of winning is set to 99%.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed with reference to the first addition lottery table or the second addition lottery table. The numbers are added. According to this configuration, it is expected that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds, and whether the number of rounds should be added. In the lottery process of whether or not, it is possible to expect that it will be an addition winning.

  The larger the number of hold information that is the target of the jackpot win in the hold information that is the target of the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the more the number of rounds is added or not in the lottery process. It is set to increase the probability of winning. Since it is assumed that the player expects the number of rounds to be added, by adopting this configuration, the jackpot is included in the hold information for which the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is performed is performed. It is possible to give a benefit to a large number of pieces of pending information corresponding to the winning.

  When comparing the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table for each number of pieces of hold information that will be a jackpot, whether the second addition lottery table adds rounds more than the first addition lottery table It is set so that the probability of winning in addition in the lottery process of whether or not is high. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The probability of winning is not set to 100%. In the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, a lottery process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed, and when the lottery process results in an addition winning, a determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed. The target hold information is cleared to “0”. Here, it is conceivable that some players want to see the effect displayed on the display screen G in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this case, if the probability of the addition winning is set to 100%, the number of times of viewing the effect displayed on the display screen G in the game times corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot winning decreases. On the other hand, according to this configuration, the probability of the addition winning is not set to 100%, so that the number of times that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is cleared to “0” is reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of times that the effects displayed on the display screen G occur in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning from being excessively reduced.

  Here, the probability of the addition winning in the first jackpot number counter and the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is not limited to being set to the above-mentioned probability, but is the same. When comparing the lottery tables, as the values of the first jackpot number counter and the second jackpot number counter increase, the addition winning probability increases, and when the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table are compared, The second addition lottery table is arbitrary as long as the probability of the addition winning is higher at the same number of jackpots than the first addition lottery table.

  Returning to the description of the jackpot winning number specifying process (FIG. 25), if the process of step S1708 or the process of step S1709 is executed, a lottery process is executed in step S1710. Specifically, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the RAM 64 is read, and the value of the lottery counter is checked against one of the addition lottery tables read into the RAM 64. .

  If it is determined that the addition has been won (step S1711: YES), the addition winning flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S1712, and the big hit winning number specifying process ends. The addition winning flag is a flag for specifying that the addition has been won in the lottery process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1711, and if “1” is set in the pending normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 or the probable variable jackpot flag in the holding in the RAM 64 in step S1713, the flag in which “1” is set is changed to “ "0" is cleared, and this jackpot winning number specifying process is terminated. The normal jackpot flag in the hold is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs the hit / fail determination processing with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 refers to the high / low probability mode permission / prohibition table to perform the permission / prohibition determination processing.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 24), when the processing of step S1608 is executed, it is determined in step S1609 whether the addition winning flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1".

  If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the processing of steps S1610 to S1612 is performed. The processing in steps S1610 to S1612 is similar to the processing in steps S1605 to S1607.

  In the present embodiment, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win exists in the hold information targeted for the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds, “1” is set to the addition win flag of the RAM 64. If it is not set, the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is not cleared to “0”. Thus, even if the number of pieces of hold information does not decrease when the jackpot is won, it can be expected that the hold information includes the hold information that becomes the jackpot win.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1609, a special round number setting process is executed in step S1613. In the special round number setting process, the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set to be larger than “0” and “1” is set to the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R certain variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64. If it is, the number of big hits is multiplied by 6 in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, and a value obtained by adding "6" to the value is set. The number of jackpot winnings is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  If the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0” and “1” is not set in the 6R ordinary jackpot flag or the 6R certain variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, The number of jackpots won is multiplied by six in the round counter RC provided in the counter area 64b, and a value obtained by adding "16" to the value is set. The number of jackpot winnings is a value set in the first jackpot number counter.

  When the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0” and “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 6R certain variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, The number of jackpots won is multiplied by 16 to the round counter RC provided in the counter area 64b, and a value obtained by adding “6” to the value is set. The big hit number is the value set in the second big hit number counter.

  In addition, the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0” and the round number RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 multiplies the winning number by 16 times, and A value obtained by adding “16” is set. The big hit number is the value set in the second big hit number counter.

  When a value is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, "1000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, and the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are set. The provided first jackpot number counter or second jackpot number counter is cleared to "0".

  In a succeeding step S1614, a pending information corresponding process is executed. In the suspension information handling process, a process for clearing the suspension information, which has been subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds, to “0” is performed. Specifically, when the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, the first start holding ball number NA is set to “0” is cleared and the first hold area Ra is cleared to “0”. On the other hand, if the hold information subject to the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb, first, “1” is added to the second start holding ball count NB. Is set. Next, the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb254 other than the reserved areas Rb2 to Rb255 higher than the reserved areas Rb to Rb254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are cleared to “0”. At the same time, the hold information that has not been subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds in the second hold area Rb is shifted to the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb.

  When the processing in step S1606 is executed, when the processing in step S1607 is executed, when the processing in step S1611 is executed, when the processing in step S1612 is executed, or when the processing in step S1614 is executed, the processing in step S1615 is executed. Execute The processing in step S1615 is the same as the processing in step S912.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the processing in steps S1616 to S1619 is performed. The processing of steps S1616 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S913 to S916.

  When the process in step S1619 is performed, various flags are cleared to "0" in step S1620, and the game state transition process ends. Specifically, “1” is set among the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R regular jackpot flag, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the pending regular jackpot flag, the pending probability variable jackpot flag, and the addition winning flag. Clears the flag that has been set to "0".

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed with reference to the first addition lottery table or the second addition lottery table. The numbers are added. According to this configuration, it is expected that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds, and whether the number of rounds should be added. In the lottery process of whether or not, it is possible to expect that it will be an addition winning.

  The larger the number of hold information that is the target of the jackpot win in the hold information that is the target of the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the more the number of rounds is added or not in the lottery process. It is set to increase the probability of winning. Since it is assumed that the player expects the number of rounds to be added, by adopting this configuration, the jackpot is included in the hold information for which the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is performed is performed. It is possible to give a benefit to a large number of pieces of pending information corresponding to the winning.

  When comparing the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table for each number of pieces of hold information that will be a jackpot, whether the second addition lottery table adds rounds more than the first addition lottery table It is set so that the probability of winning in addition in the lottery process of whether or not is high. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  The probability of winning is not set to 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed, and when the lottery process results in an addition winning, the hold information which is a target of the process for determining whether to add the number of rounds Is cleared to "0". Here, it is conceivable that some players want to see the effect displayed on the display screen G in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this case, if the probability of the addition winning is set to 100%, the number of times of viewing the effect displayed on the display screen G in the game times corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot winning decreases. On the other hand, according to this configuration, the probability of the addition winning is not set to 100%, so that the number of times that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is cleared to “0” is reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of times that the effects displayed on the display screen G occur in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning from being excessively reduced.

  When "1" is not set in the addition winning flag of the RAM 64 even if the holding information corresponding to the jackpot win exists in the holding information targeted for the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds. On the other hand, “0” is not cleared to the pending information that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. Thus, even if the number of pieces of hold information does not decrease when the jackpot is won, it can be expected that the hold information includes the hold information that becomes the jackpot win.

<Another example of the second embodiment>
(1) A lottery that determines whether or not to add the number of rounds in a situation where the hold information that is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win In the case where the addition has not been won in the processing, the next lottery processing may be configured to be likely to be the addition winning or to always be the addition winning. If the non-additional winnings occur consecutively in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the player may be frustrated by that. In this regard, by adopting this configuration, in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, it is difficult to consecutively prevent the non-winning of the addition or to continuously occur. It is possible to prevent. As a result, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration with respect to the non-winning of the addition in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds.

  (2) When a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot win are included in the hold information subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds, the jackpot result is determined in the hold information determination processing of the hold information. Each time, a lottery process for determining whether to add the number of rounds may be executed. Further, in this case, in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, as the number of times of non-additional winnings occurs continuously, the probability of the addition winning in the lottery process may be increased. . According to this configuration, the number of rounds is not added in a situation where the number of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is large among the pieces of hold information targeted for the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds It is possible to reduce the frequency at which the situation occurs.

  (3) In the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the probability of the addition winning depends on the number of the hold information acquired at the stage when the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is started. It may be configured. Specifically, the greater the number of pieces of hold information obtained at the stage when the game round corresponding to the jackpot win has started, the higher the probability of the addition win in the lottery process may be.

  A configuration may be adopted in which, as the number of game times consumed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is increased, the probability of winning in the lottery process for determining whether to add the number of rounds is increased. According to this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game even in a situation where the number of times of playing has been exhausted since the end of the open / close execution mode.

  (4) Reservation areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds and reservation areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to lottery processing to determine whether to add the number of rounds May be different. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the user want to store the hold information in both the first hold area Ra and the second hold area Rb, instead of storing either one of the hold areas Ra and Rb. Become.

  (5) The win / fail determination processing may be performed at the timing of acquiring the hold information, and if a jackpot is won in the win / fail determination processing, a lottery process may be performed to determine whether to add the number of rounds. In this configuration, the effect corresponding to whether or not the number of rounds is added may be displayed on the display screen G until the game time corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the number of rounds is added. Further, in this configuration, when the winning is determined in the lottery process for determining whether to add the number of rounds, the jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one, and the jackpot number counter is added. Is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  (6) In the lottery processing for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, when the addition is not won, the fluctuation display time of the hold information targeted for the processing for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is shortened. An easy configuration may be adopted. According to this configuration, even if the addition is not won in the lottery process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the jackpot is included in the hold information targeted for the process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds. It is possible to give a benefit to the fact that the suspension information corresponding to the winning is included.

  (7) When the value of the first jackpot number counter or the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a lottery process for determining whether to add the number of rounds. May be configured such that the probability of winning in addition is set to 100%.

  (8) In the first addition lottery table and the second addition lottery table, the addition winning probability is set to be the same, and the second addition lottery table is one addition winning probability than the first addition lottery table. May be set so that the number of pieces of hold information that wins the jackpot corresponding to the number of hits increases. Specifically, when the first jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "1" or the second jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "3", the addition winning is performed. When the probability is set to 50% and the first jackpot number counter is “2” or the second jackpot number counter is “4”, the addition winning probability is set to 60% and the first jackpot number is set to 60%. When the jackpot number counter is “3” or the second jackpot number counter is “5”, the addition winning probability is set to 70%, and the first jackpot number counter is “4” or more, or the second jackpot number counter is “2”. When the jackpot number counter is “6” or more, the addition winning probability may be set to 90%. Here, the case where the second addition lottery table is referred to means that the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds are the second holding areas Rb. The mode is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. The frequency of winning in the lower working port 24 in the situation of the high frequency support mode and the winning of the upper working port 23 in the situation of the low frequency support mode (the situation where the first addition lottery table is referred to) are described. When compared with the frequency of occurrence, the former occurs more frequently than the latter. Accordingly, the second addition lottery table is set so that the number of pieces of hold information that becomes a jackpot winning corresponding to one addition winning probability is set to be larger than that of the first addition lottery table. This makes it possible to prevent the frequency of adding the number of rounds from becoming too high as compared with the case of the low probability mode.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the number of hold information that can be digested at one time. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Simultaneous digestion button 120>
In the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously digest the hold information stored in any of the first and second holding areas Ra and Rb. The simultaneous digestion means that in one game, a plurality of hold information is subjected to the hit / fail determination processing, and the plurality of hold information subjected to the hit / fail determination processing is deleted. An apparatus for performing the simultaneous digestion will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 27, a simultaneous digestion button 120 is provided in the upper bulging portion 56. The simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated when simultaneously digesting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  A simultaneous detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an operation of the simultaneous digestion button 120 is connected to an input side of the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. When the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated, the simultaneous detection sensor outputs an HI level signal to the MPU 62. When the simultaneous digestion button 120 is not operated, the simultaneous detection sensor outputs a LOW level signal to the MPU 62. Output. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which a LOW level signal is output when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated, and an HI level signal is output when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is not operated. Alternatively, the electric signal may be output only when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated.

  According to the present embodiment, by operating the simultaneous digestion button 120, the hold information stored in any of the first and second holding areas Ra and Rb is stored. Simultaneous digestion becomes possible. As a result, even a player who has a limited playing time can play a game with peace of mind.

<Execution area AE>
Next, the execution area AE in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for describing the execution area AE.

As shown in FIG. 28, the execution area AE includes a first hold corresponding area AE <b> 1 to a 255th hold corresponding area AE <b> 255, and starts a change display of the upper working port display unit 33 or the lower working port display unit 34. At this time, it is an area for moving the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra or the hold information stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb255 of the second hold area Rb, Based on the hold information stored in the execution area AE, a determination as to whether or not the information is valid is made.

  The hold information stored in the n-th hold area of the hold areas Ra and Rb is stored in the n-th hold corresponding area of the execution area AE. When the number of reserved items to be consumed is one, the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra1 is moved to the first reserved area AE1. Further, when the holding information stored in the holding areas Ra and Rb is simultaneously digested, the holding information corresponds to the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra or the holding areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second holding area Rb. The hold information is moved to the hold corresponding areas AE1 to AE255. Thus, even if a plurality of pieces of hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb are simultaneously shifted to the execution area AE, it is mainly determined which of the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 and Rb1 to Rb254 corresponds to the hold information. It can be specified by the MPU 62 of the control device 60.

<Game round control process>
The game number control process executed in step S403 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a game round control process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, the processing of steps S1801 to S1803 is the same as the processing of steps S501 to S503. If a negative determination is made in step S1803, it is determined in step S1804 whether the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". The simultaneous digestion flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 digests a plurality of pieces of hold information at one time in one game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the first data setting process is executed in step S1805, and the first change start process is executed in step S1806. The first data setting process is the same process as the data setting process executed in step S504, and the first change start process is the same process as the change start process executed in step S505.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, simultaneous digestion processing is executed in step S1807. The simultaneous digestion processing will be described with reference to FIG. The simultaneous digestion process is a process performed when digesting a plurality of pending information at once in one game. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the simultaneous digestion processing executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60.

  First, in step S1901, the value stored in the second reserved number storage area NB of the second reserved area Rb is read, and the second starting reserved ball count NB reserved and stored in the second reserved area Rb is set to "2". Is determined. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be simultaneously digested differ according to the number of holding information stored in the respective holding areas Ra and Rb. By providing the processing in step S1901, it is possible to specify the holding areas Ra and Rb to be simultaneously digested by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the number to be simultaneously digested is set in the simultaneous digestion number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1902. The simultaneous digestion number counter is a counter for specifying the number to be simultaneously digested by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. In step S1902, specifically, the value of the first start-holding ball number NA is set in the simultaneous digestion number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  In the following step S1903, the first start pending ball number NA is cleared to “0”. In the following step S1904, all data in the first hold area Ra is transferred to the execution area AE. As described above, the execution area AE includes 255 suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255. The holding corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 correspond to the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra and the holding areas Rb1 to Rb255 of the second holding area Rb. In step S1904, specifically, the value of the simultaneous digestion number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped, and the values of the simultaneous digestion number counter are stored in the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra. The stored hold information is transferred to the corresponding hold corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 in the execution area AE. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the hold information stored in the first holding area Ra is simultaneously consumed, if the simultaneous consumption number counter is “2”, the information is stored in the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra. The hold information transferred to the first hold corresponding area AE1 of the execution area AE, and the hold information stored in the second hold area Ra2 of the first hold area Ra is transferred to the second hold corresponding area AE2 of the execution area AE. I do.

  In the following step S1905, the first hold area Ra is cleared to "0". By this processing, the number of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra becomes “0”.

  In step S1906, a hold information deletion command is set. The hold information deletion command is a command for specifying the timing at which the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 stops displaying the number displayed in the first hold number display area Ga. The hold information deletion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the hold information deletion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  Here, the processing of the display control device 100 corresponding to the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command corresponding process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the above-mentioned hold information deletion command from the audio light emission control device 90 (step S2001: YES), the first MPU 102 stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2002. The display-side reserved storage number laN1 is cleared to "0".

  In subsequent step S2003, information for stopping the display of the first reserved number display area Ga is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the number corresponding to the number of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is not displayed in the first hold number display area Ga.

  Returning to the description of the simultaneous digestion process (FIG. 30), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S1907. The lower working port trigger flag is a flag for specifying that the game round has been started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the lower working port 24.

  In step S1908, the number to be simultaneously digested is set in the simultaneous digestion number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the second start-reserved ball number NB-1 by a simultaneous digestion number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set.

  In step S1909, “1” is set to the second starting suspension ball count NB. In subsequent step S1910, the target data in the second holding area Rb is shifted to the execution area AE. Specifically, the value of the simultaneous digestion number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped, and the value of the simultaneous digestion number counter is stored in the holding areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second holding area Rb. The held information is transferred to the corresponding held areas AE1 to AE254 in the execution area AE. More specifically, for example, in a situation where the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is simultaneously consumed (a situation in which the lower working port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”), the simultaneous consumption number counter is set to “ In the case of "2", the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb is transferred to the first hold corresponding area AE1 of the execution area AE, and the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb is transferred. Is transferred to the second suspension corresponding area AE2 of the execution area AE.

  In subsequent step S1911, the data in the second holding area Rb is shifted. Specifically, in the situation where the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is simultaneously consumed, the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 corresponding to the values of the simultaneous consumption number counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are used. The hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 other than the upper hold areas Rb2 to Rb255 are cleared to “0”, and the hold information that is not subject to simultaneous digestion is shifted to the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb.

  According to the present embodiment, when the second starting hold ball count NB is larger than “2”, one of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb and the other hold information are retained. Information is digested simultaneously. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb will be the target of executing the game after the end of the open / close execution mode when the holding information is simultaneously digested.

  In a succeeding step S1912, a special shift command is set. The special shift command is a command for specifying the timing at which the number displayed in the second hold number display area Gb by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is set to “1”. The special shift command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the special shift command as it is to the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the special shift command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S2004: YES), the second control stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2005 is performed. "1" is set to the display side reserved storage number lbN1.

  In subsequent step S2006, information for setting the display of the second hold number display area Gb to “1” is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, “1” is displayed in the second hold number display area Gb in accordance with the number of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb.

  Returning to the description of the simultaneous digestion process (FIG. 30), when the process of step S1906 is executed or the process of step S1912 is executed, a simultaneous variation start process is executed in step S1913. The simultaneous fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. The simultaneous variation start process is a process for starting the variation display when the suspension information is simultaneously consumed. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the simultaneous fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S2101, the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The execution determination process number counter specifies the suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE in which the success / failure determination process is performed based on the suspension information in the situation where the suspension information is simultaneously digested by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a counter for. The initial value of the execution determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S2102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the value of the execution determination process number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped. In the present embodiment, the values of the execution determination process number counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 correspond to the suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE. Specifically, when the execution determination process number counter is “1”, the first hold corresponding area AE1 of the execution area AE corresponds, and when the execution determination process number counter is “255”, the execution is performed. The area AE255 corresponding to the 255th suspension corresponding to the area AE corresponds. In step S2102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the suspension corresponding area AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE corresponding to the value of the execution determination processing number counter specifically provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped. I do.

  In the following step S2103, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag or high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S2101 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S2101 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. judge.

  If a jackpot is won in the processing of step S2104 or the processing of step S2105 (step S2106: YES), the first simultaneous jackpot number counter or the second simultaneous jackpot number provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2107. The counter is incremented by "1". The first simultaneous jackpot number counter is the number of pieces of hold information that will be a jackpot win when the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is simultaneously digested by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Is a counter for specifying the The above-mentioned second simultaneous jackpot number counter is the number of pieces of hold information that will become a jackpot winning when the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is simultaneously consumed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Is a counter for specifying the In step S2107, specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64, “1” is added to the first simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. If “1” is set in the lower working port trigger flag of the RAM 64, “1” is added to the second simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64.

  In step S2108, a type determination process is performed. In the type determination processing, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the suspension corresponding areas AE1 to AE255 of the execution area AE corresponding to the value of the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped.

  If the lower working port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the upper jackpot type counter ascertained by referring to the upper working port distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. It specifies which jackpot result the value of C2 corresponds to among the 6R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variable jackpot result. On the other hand, when the lower working port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the jackpot type counter ascertained by referring to the distribution table for the lower working port stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Which of the jackpot results corresponds to the value of C2 among the 16R normal jackpot result and the 16R probability variable jackpot result is specified.

  If the result of the 6R probability variable jackpot result or the 16R probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the process of step S2108 (step S2109: YES), whether or not “1” is set to the 6R ordinary jackpot flag or 16R ordinary jackpot flag of the RAM 64 in step S2110 Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the flag in which “1” is set is cleared to “0” among the 6R normal big hit flag and the 16R normal big hit flag in the RAM 64 in step S2111.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2110, it is determined in step S2112 whether the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". When the process of step S2111 is executed or when a negative determination is made in step S2112, the process of the type determination process executed in step S2108 is performed in step S2113, out of the 6R certain variable big hit flag and the 16R certain variable big hit flag in the RAM 64 in step S2113. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2109, it is determined in step S2114 whether or not “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2114, the flag in which “1” is set is cleared to “0” in the RAM 64 in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag in step S2115.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2114, it is determined in step S2116 whether the 6R normal jackpot flag or 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". When the process of step S2115 is executed or when a negative determination is made in step S2116, the process of the type determination process executed in step S2108 of the 6R normal big hit flag and the 16R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 in step S2117. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, a process in step S2113 is performed, an affirmative determination is performed in step S2116, or a process is performed in step S2117, the process proceeds to step S2118. It is determined whether the value of the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 and the value of the simultaneous digestion number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are the same. If a negative determination is made in step S2118, the processes in steps S2101 to S2117 are executed again.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2118, post-simultaneous digestion determination processing is executed in step S2119. The post-simultaneous digestion determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The post-simultaneous digestion determination process is performed in order to set a time from when the suspension information is simultaneously digested to when a stop result or a pass / fail result is displayed. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the post-simultaneous digestion determination process executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal big hit flag, 16R normal big hit flag, 6R certain variable big hit flag, or 16R certain variable big hit flag of the RAM 64.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed in step S2202. Specifically, when the lower operation port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the mode of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the upper operation port display unit 33 in the game time related to the start of the current fluctuation. Is identified from the stop result table for the first jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, and the identified information is stored in the RAM 64. In the stop result table for the first jackpot result, the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the upper operating port display unit 33 is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. The information on the mode of the picture according to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, when the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the information of the pattern form that is finally stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display unit 34 in the game time related to the start of the change is displayed. , From the stop result table for the second jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, and stores the specified information in the RAM 64. In the stop result table for the second jackpot result, the type of the pattern of the pattern stopped and displayed on the lower working port display unit 34 is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. The information on the mode of the picture according to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 64.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, a stop result setting process for a departure result is executed in step S2203. Specifically, when the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the pattern of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the upper operating port display unit 33 in the game time related to the start of the change is described below. The information is specified from the stop result table for the deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the information of the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display section 34 in the game time related to the start of the change is stored in the ROM 63. The information is specified from the stop result table for the departure result stored in advance in the RAM 64, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  When the process of step S2202 or the process of step S2203 is performed, a setting process of the result display time is performed in step S2204. Specifically, a value corresponding to the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set. The value set in the variable display time counter is set to one type. Specifically, “2500” is set in the variable display time counter. The value set in the variable display time counter in the case of simultaneous digestion is not set in the case of digesting one hold information.

  In the next step S2205, a variation command and a type command are set. The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. As described above, the value set in the variable display time counter in the case of simultaneous digestion is not set in the case of digesting one hold information. , It is possible to specify whether or not the suspension information has been simultaneously digested. In the above type command, when the hold information which becomes a jackpot is included in the hold information which is simultaneously digested, when the open / close execution mode is ended and the win / loss lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the win / win lottery mode is set. Contains information for shifting to the high-probability mode, and includes information for shifting the success / failure lottery mode to the low-probability mode when the success / absence lottery mode transitions to the low-probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  The variation command and the type command set in step S2205 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Based on the received variation command and type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether the win / loss lottery mode is one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  If the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (when “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64), it is displayed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of the even symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of the even symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (when “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64), one of the activated lines L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of odd symbols is established above is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when all of the success / failure results of the hold information that have been simultaneously digested are out-of-results, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is used as information of the current stop result. To be determined. In this case, the types of symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the suspended information is simultaneously digested, the announcement effect and the reach effect do not occur, so that the process of determining the advance effect and the reach effect is not performed.

  Next, based on the received command for change and the type command, the effect pattern of the game times related to the start of the change is determined. In this case, the content of the effect is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90 in advance. The contents of the effect will be specifically described.

  Regardless of the success / failure result of the simultaneous digestion holding information, when the game round corresponding to the simultaneous digestion is started, the symbol change display is started on the display screen G. If the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, “Lucky” is displayed on the display screen G at the timing when the same even symbol is stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5. Is done. When the winning / rejecting lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, “super lucky” is displayed on the display screen G at the timing when the same odd symbol is stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5. Is displayed. In the hit / fail judgment process, referring to the hit / fail table for the high-probability mode is more likely to result in a jackpot than referring to the hit / fail table for the low-probability mode. Is displayed in the display screen G as "super lucky", which is luckier than "lucky".

  In addition, when all the results of the simultaneous information of the hold information are out of order, "Sorry" is displayed on the display screen G at the timing when the non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5. Is done.

  The MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 in the game time related to the start of the change in accordance with the determined effect pattern.

  Next, the display control device 100 transmits a stop result command corresponding to the stop result and a pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the game times related to the start of the change.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for performing the effect for the game round relating to the start of the change on the symbol display device 31 based on the received stop result command and the pattern command. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time a predetermined image update timing is set according to the table (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 31, the effect for the game round is executed in accordance with the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally displayed as a stop. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, when the suspension information is simultaneously digested, not all the stop results in the simultaneously digested suspension information are displayed, but only one suspension result is displayed. Specifically, when the hold information is simultaneously digested and the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode, a stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on the activated lines L1 to L5. Is displayed, and if the hold information is simultaneously digested, and if the winning / losing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode, the stop result in which the same odd symbol combination is established on the activated lines L1 to L5 is obtained. When all of the displayed success / failure results of the hold information are out of order, a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is displayed. This makes it possible to inform the player of the type of the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode in a state where the hold information is simultaneously consumed.

  In subsequent step S2206, after the display of the variation of the picture is started on the display units 33 and 34, the variation start processing is ended. Specifically, when “1” is not set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the variation display of the pattern is started on the upper operating port display unit 33, and “1” is set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64. Is set, the display of the change of the picture is started on the display 34 for the lower working port.

  Returning to the description of the simultaneous variation start processing (FIG. 32), after executing the processing of step S2119, in step S2120, the execution determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 and the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 Is cleared to "0", and the simultaneous variation start processing ends.

  Returning to the description of the game times control processing (FIG. 29), after executing the processing in step S1807, the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1808. Since the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” in the process, even when the hold information is simultaneously digested, the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is set to “1” when the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated. It can be set.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1809 whether the fluctuation display time of the game times has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1809, it is determined in step S1810 whether the simultaneous digestion button 120 has been operated. The simultaneous digestion button 120 is a button operated when simultaneously digesting the hold information stored in any of the first and second holding areas Ra and Rb. is there. Specifically, in this process, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the simultaneous detection sensor (not shown) has been switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, in step S1811, the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start pending ball count NB is “0”, or the second start pending ball count NB is “ 2 ”is determined. In the present embodiment, a situation in which the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start pending ball count NB is “0”, or the second start pending ball count NB is greater than “2”. Only in situations can the pending information be digested simultaneously. In the present embodiment, when the first start-reserved ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “1-2”, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra Cannot be digested simultaneously. Here, as in the first embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is digested earlier than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, as in the first embodiment. It has a configuration. In this configuration, the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra in a situation where the first starting holding ball number NA is larger than “1” and the second starting holding ball number NB is “1-2”. Can be simultaneously digested, in the situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is digested first. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the first start-reserved ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “1-2”, the ball is stored in the first reservation area Ra. Because it is not possible to simultaneously digest the pending information
In a situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb, the hold information can be simultaneously digested while preventing the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra from being digested first. It becomes possible.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1811, it is determined in step S1812 whether the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". As described above, the simultaneous digestion flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 digests a plurality of pieces of hold information at one time in one game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1812, “1” is set to the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 in step S1813. In the following step S1814, it is determined whether the first start-reserved ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1814, a first simultaneous digestion command is set in step S1815. The first simultaneous digestion command refers to simultaneous digestion in a situation where the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start pending ball count NB is “0” in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. This is a command for specifying that the button 120 has been operated. The first simultaneous digestion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the first simultaneous digestion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the first simultaneous digestion command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2007: YES), information for displaying the first simultaneous digestion image in step S2008. Is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the first simultaneous digestion image is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, the message “The next fluctuation may be simultaneous digestion” is displayed at the top of the display screen G, and “If a prize to the lower operation port 24 occurs, the lower operation The number of pieces of hold information corresponding to the winning in the mouth 24 should be three or more. " In the present embodiment, as described above, when the first start-reserved ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “1-2”, the ball is stored in the first reserved area Ra. Simultaneous digestion is not performed for the pending information that has been set. According to this configuration, in the case where the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated when the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start pending ball count NB is “0”, the downward operation is performed. When the winning in the mouth 24 occurs, it is possible to cause the player to specify that the holding information is not simultaneously digested unless the holding information corresponding to the winning in the lower operating port 24 is three or more.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 29), if a negative determination is made in step S1814, a second simultaneous digestion command is set in step S1816. The second simultaneous digestion command is used to specify the timing at which the simultaneous digestion button 120 has been operated in a situation where the second start-hold ball count NB is greater than “2” in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Command. The second simultaneous digestion command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the second simultaneous digestion command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the second simultaneous digestion command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2009: YES), information for displaying the second simultaneous digestion image in step S2010. Is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the second simultaneous digestion image is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, on the display screen G, an image of “the next fluctuation is simultaneously consumed” is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to specify that the next fluctuation is always consumed simultaneously.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 29), if the affirmative determination is made in step S1812, the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1817. In a succeeding step S1818, a simultaneous digestion release command is set. The simultaneous digestion release command is a command for specifying the timing at which the display of the first simultaneous digestion image or the second simultaneous digestion image displayed on the display screen G by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is stopped. . The simultaneous digestion release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits the simultaneous digestion release command to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the display control device 100 receives the simultaneous digestion release command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S2011: YES), the display control device 100 displays the first or second simultaneous digestion image in step S2012. Is transmitted to the VDP 105. Accordingly, the display of the first or second simultaneous digestion image on the display screen G is stopped.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to change whether or not the suspension information is simultaneously consumed until the fluctuation display time of the game times elapses. Here, if the configuration is such that it is not possible to change whether or not the hold information is simultaneously digested, for example, if the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated by mistake, the hold information can be simultaneously digested even if it is not desired to simultaneously digest the hold information. Will be done. In this regard, according to this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not to simultaneously hold the hold information until the fluctuation display time of the game times elapses. This makes it possible to digest the hold information as desired by the player.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 29), if a negative determination is made in step S1810, if a negative determination is made in step S1811, if the process in step S1815 is performed, if the process in step S1816 is performed, or If the processing in step S1818 has been executed, the processing for variable display is executed in step S1819. In the variable display process, if “1” is not set in the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64, the display mode on the upper operating port display unit 33 is changed, and the lower operating port trigger flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Is set, the display mode in the lower working port display section 34 is changed.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the processing in steps S1820 to S1823 is performed. The processing of steps S1820 to S1823 is similar to the processing of steps S508 to S511.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1822 or when the process of step S1823 is performed, the processes of steps S1824 to S1826 are performed. Here, when the first start-reserved ball count NA is larger than “1” and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “1-2” when the fluctuation display is completed, the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is set to “1”. When "1" is set, simultaneous digestion is performed on the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. In the processing of steps S1824 to S1826, if the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in the above situation, a process of clearing the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64 to “0” is performed.

  First, in step S1824, it is determined whether the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start pending ball count NB is “1-2”. If a negative determination is made in step S1824, the present game round control process ends.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1824, it is determined in step S1825 whether or not “1” is set in the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S1825, the present game round control process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1825, the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S1826, and the game time control process ends. According to this configuration, in a situation where the first start-reserved ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “1-2”, “1” is set to the simultaneous digestion flag of the RAM 64. Even if it has been done, the simultaneous digestion flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" at the end of the variable display. Accordingly, in a situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb, it is possible to prevent the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra from being simultaneously digested.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition process executed in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, the processing of steps S2301 to S2303 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S903. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, it is determined in step S2304 whether the first simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than "0". The first simultaneous jackpot number counter is, as described above, a jackpot winning included when the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 simultaneously digests the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra. This is a counter for specifying the number of pieces of pending information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, a value obtained by multiplying the number of jackpots by six is set in a round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2305. The number of hit jackpots is a value set in a first simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  In step S2305, “1000” is set as a waiting period for opening in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. In a succeeding step S2306, the first simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0".

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2304, a value obtained by multiplying the number of winning jackpots by 16 is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2307. The jackpot number is a value set in a second simultaneous jackpot counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  In step S2307, "1000" is set as the opening standby period in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. In a succeeding step S2308, the second simultaneous jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0".

  According to this embodiment, in the situation where the hold information is simultaneously digested, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the simultaneously digested hold information, the number of the hold information that has become the jackpot win The number of rounds is added according to. It is necessary to operate the simultaneous digestion button 120 to simultaneously digest the hold information. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to actively operate the simultaneous digestion button 120.

  In a situation where there are a plurality of pieces of hold information that will be a big hit in the hold information, the number of rounds is added by operating the simultaneous digestion button 120 by the player. That is, in the above situation, the round number is not added unless the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated by the player. Therefore, with this configuration, when the number of rounds is added, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

  If the processing in step S2306 or the processing in step S2308 has been performed, an opening command is set in step S2309, and the game state transition processing ends. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect setting process for the open / close execution mode. According to the set effect pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

  The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process. The display control device 100 reads a data table from the program ROM 103 based on the received opening / closing execution mode command and performs the present opening / closing execution mode effect on the symbol display device 31, and determines a data table in advance according to the data table. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 every time the image update timing comes (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thus, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the processing in steps S2310 to S2312 is the same as the processing in steps S913 to S915. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2312, a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is performed in step S2313. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, and “1” is set to the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. If not, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 are set to “1”. When the 6R normal jackpot flag or 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, and the high probability mode of the RAM 64 is determined. When the flag is set to “1”, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support flag of the RAM 64 are cleared to “0”.

  When the process of step S2313 is executed, various flags are cleared to “0” in step S2314, and the game state transition process ends. Specifically, among the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag, the flag in which “1” is set is cleared to “0”.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, by operating the simultaneous digestion button 120, it is possible to simultaneously digest the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb. As a result, even a player who has a limited playing time can play a game with peace of mind.

  When the second start-reserved ball count NB is larger than "2", the remaining reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb is simultaneously digested except one reserved information. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb will be the target of executing the game after the end of the open / close execution mode when the holding information is simultaneously digested.

  When the suspension information is simultaneously digested, not all the stop results in the simultaneously digested suspension information are displayed, but only one suspension result is displayed. Specifically, when the hold information is simultaneously digested and the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode, a stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on the activated lines L1 to L5. Is displayed, and if the hold information is simultaneously digested, and if the winning / losing lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode, the stop result in which the same odd symbol combination is established on the activated lines L1 to L5 is obtained. When all of the displayed success / failure results of the hold information are out of order, a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is displayed. This makes it possible to inform the player of the type of the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode in a state where the hold information is simultaneously consumed.

  As long as the fluctuation display time of the game times elapses, it is possible to change whether or not to simultaneously digest the hold information. Here, if the configuration is such that it is not possible to change whether or not the hold information is simultaneously digested, for example, if the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated by mistake, the hold information can be simultaneously digested even if it is not desired to simultaneously digest the hold information. Will be done. In this regard, according to this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not to simultaneously hold the hold information until the fluctuation display time of the game times elapses. This makes it possible to digest the hold information as desired by the player.

  In the situation where the hold information is simultaneously digested, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the simultaneously digested hold information, the number of rounds is added according to the number of the hold information that has won the jackpot. Is done. It is necessary to operate the simultaneous digestion button 120 to simultaneously digest the hold information. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to actively operate the simultaneous digestion button 120.

  In a situation where there are a plurality of pieces of hold information that will be a big hit in the hold information, the number of rounds is added by operating the simultaneous digestion button 120 by the player. That is, in the above situation, the round number is not added unless the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated by the player. Therefore, with this configuration, when the number of rounds is added, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

  When the first start-reserved ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start-reserved ball count NB is “1-2”, simultaneous extinguishing is performed in the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra. I can't. According to this configuration, in a situation where the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is not digested first while the hold information is stored. Can be simultaneously digested.

  When the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated in a situation where the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “1” and the second start pending ball count NB is “0”, depending on conditions on the display screen G, A first simultaneous digestion image for notifying that the suspension information may not be simultaneously digested is displayed. Thereby, even if the simultaneous digestion button 120 is operated, it is possible for the player to specify that the held information is not simultaneously digested.

<Another Example of Third Embodiment>
(1) When the suspension information is simultaneously digested, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which only one stop result is displayed on the display screen G. When the suspension information is simultaneously digested, the display screen G is displayed. In this case, all the stop results of the simultaneously suspended information may be displayed. Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a suspension result of the suspension information that is simultaneously digested in the order in which the suspension information is acquired is displayed.

  Further, only when there are a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, a plurality of stop results corresponding to the jackpot winning may be displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of not only the number of pieces of suspension information that will be a jackpot winning but also a plurality of stop results corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  (2) When the suspension information is simultaneously digested, not only the stop result is displayed on the display screen G, but also the stop result is displayed after the notice effect and the reach effect are displayed on the display screen G. May be adopted. In this case, depending on whether or not the hold information that has been simultaneously digested includes the hold information for winning the jackpot, the occurrence probability of the notice effect and the reach effect that can be expected for the jackpot may be different. . Specifically, if the hold information that has been simultaneously digested includes the hold information that results in a jackpot winning, the probability of occurrence of a notice effect and a reach effect that can be expected for the jackpot win is high. If the hold information that does not include the jackpot winning hold information is included, the frequency of the notice effect and the reach effect that can be expected for the jackpot winning may be low. In addition, the time when the notice effect and the reach effect are generated may be shorter in the case where the on-hold information is simultaneously digested than in the case where one on-hold information is digested.

  (3) It may be configured such that the player can select the number of pieces of hold information to be simultaneously digested. Specifically, the upper bulging portion 56 may be provided with a selection button operated to select the number of pieces of hold information to be simultaneously digested. When the suspend information to be simultaneously digested can be selected, an image for determining the number of suspend information to be simultaneously digested is displayed on the display screen G. By operating the selection button, the player can select the number of pieces of hold information to be simultaneously digested. By operating the simultaneous digestion button 120 in a situation where the number of pieces of pending information to be simultaneously digested is selected, it becomes possible to simultaneously digest the pending information by the number of pieces of pending information selected by the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to determine the number of pieces of suspension information to be simultaneously digested according to the convenience of the player.

  (4) The jackpot winning probability may be different between the case where the reservation information is simultaneously digested and the case where the reservation information is not simultaneously digested. Specifically, the ROM 63 is provided with a hit / fail table corresponding to the case where the hold information is not simultaneously digested and a hit / fail table corresponding to the case where the hold information is simultaneously digested. A configuration in which the determination process is performed may be adopted. In this case, it may be configured such that the simultaneous digestion of the suspension information has a lower jackpot winning probability than the case where the suspension information is not simultaneously digested. Here, assuming that the jackpot winning probability when the hold information is simultaneously digested is the same as the jackpot probability when the hold information is not simultaneously digested, a pattern for allowing the player to digest the hold information one by one is provided. It is difficult to select. In this case, the degree of attention to the notice effect and the reach effect generated on the display screen G decreases. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the setting is made so that the jackpot winning probability is higher in the case where the hold information is not digested simultaneously than in the case where the hold information is digested simultaneously. It is possible to prevent the probability that the digestion pattern is selected from being too low. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the notice effect and the reach effect occurring on the display screen G from decreasing.

  (5) Regardless of whether it is fluctuating or not, it may be configured to be able to determine whether or not to simultaneously digest the hold information. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the hold information has not been acquired, by operating the simultaneous digestion button 120, the hold information may be simultaneously digested every time a predetermined number of the hold information is accumulated.

  (6) When the hold information is simultaneously digested, the success / failure determination processing is performed in the order in which the hold information is acquired, and if the jackpot is won in the success / failure determination processing, after the hold information that becomes the big hit win The configuration may be such that the processing of determining whether the acquired hold information is correct is not performed. Here, there is a possibility that some of the players wish to finish the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning. In that regard, according to the configuration, the upper limit of the number of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning when the hold information is simultaneously digested is set, so that the jackpot is won when the hold information is simultaneously digested. When the number of pieces of suspension information reaches the upper limit, the validity / non-permission judgment processing of the suspension information acquired thereafter is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of times that the effect displayed on the display screen G is seen from decreasing in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  (7) When a jackpot is won in a situation where the hold information is simultaneously digested, the hold information acquired during the change may be subjected to a determination process as to whether or not to add the number of rounds. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in a state where the hold information is simultaneously digested, a win / fail determination process of the hold information acquired during the change is performed. The number of rounds is added in accordance with the number of pieces of pending information that have been won in the hit determination processing. In this case, the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is cleared to “0”. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the number of rounds will increase, and to increase the speed of digesting the pending information.

<Fourth embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the type of the success / failure table referred to in the success / failure determination processing of the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<First jackpot information identification process>
The first jackpot information specifying process executed in step S1003 of the jackpot winning number specifying process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot information specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, in step S2401, the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The first determination processing number counter is determined by the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra for which the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines whether or not to add the number of rounds. This is a counter for specifying the reserved areas Ra1 to Ra255 where the processing is performed. The initial value of the first determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S2402, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 in the first holding area Ra is grasped. In the present embodiment, the values of the first determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 correspond to the holding areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first holding area Ra. Specifically, when the first determination processing number counter is “1”, the first reservation area Ra1 of the first reservation area Ra corresponds, and when the first determination processing number counter is “255”. , The 255th reserved area Ra255 of the first reserved area Ra corresponds. In step S2402, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 corresponding to the values of the first determination processing number counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped.

  In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in the above step S2402 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode.

  In the process of step S2403, when a big hit is won (step S2404: YES), the first big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one in step S2405. The first jackpot number counter is the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra1 to Ra255 of the first hold area Ra for which the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 determines whether or not to add the number of rounds. Is a counter for specifying how much of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2404, or if the process in step S2405 is performed, then in step S2406, the first determination process number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 stores the value of the first start pending ball number NA with It is determined whether they are the same. If a negative determination is made in step S2406, the processing in steps S2401 to S2405 is executed again. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the first jackpot information specifying process ends.

<Second jackpot information identification process>
The second jackpot information specifying process executed in step S1005 of the jackpot winning number specifying process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second jackpot information specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S2501, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one. The second determination process number counter is determined by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb, which is the target of the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. This is a counter for specifying the reserved areas Rb1 to Rb254 where the processing is performed. The initial value of the second determination processing number counter is set to “0”.

  In step S2502, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 in the second holding area Rb is grasped. In the present embodiment, the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 corresponds to the holding areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second holding area Rb. Specifically, when the second determination processing number counter is “1”, the first reservation area Rb1 of the second reservation area Rb corresponds, and when the second determination processing number counter is “254”. 254th reserved area Rb254 of the second reserved area Rb. In step S2502, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 corresponding to the value of the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is specifically grasped.

  In the following step S2503, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in the above step S2502 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode.

  In the process of step S2503, when a big hit is won (step S2504: YES), the second big hit number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one in step S2505. The second jackpot number counter is the hold information stored in the hold areas Rb1 to Rb254 of the second hold area Rb which is the target of the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Is a counter for specifying how much of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2504 or if the processing in step S2505 is performed, the second determination processing number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2506 indicates that the second start-remaining ball count NB-1 It is determined whether or not the value is the same. If a negative determination is made in step S2506, the processing in steps S2501 to S2505 is executed again. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2506, the second jackpot information specifying process ends.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is to determine whether to add the type of the jackpot result and the number of rounds that triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode. Regardless of the type of the jackpot result included in the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing, the determination processing is performed with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table. Here, when the hold information corresponding to the on-hold 6R probability change jackpot result or the on-hold 16R probability change jackpot result is included in the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds, In the hold information stored after the hold information, if it is configured that the hit / fail determination process is performed with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the jackpot winning probability when referring to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode is 30. Since the number is one-half, there is a possibility that the number of pieces of hold information that is a jackpot winning included in the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds becomes too large. In this regard, according to this configuration, the suspension information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is always subjected to the success / failure determination process with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Since the jackpot winning probability at the time of performing the hit determination process with reference to the hit probability table for the low probability mode is set to 1/300, the hit determination process is subject to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. Even if the number of suspension information is large, the number of suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the suspension information does not become too large. This makes it possible to prevent the number of rounds from becoming too large.

  The hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds is configured such that the determination process is performed by referring to the determination table for the low-probability mode. Processing can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the types of tables are different.

  In the first jackpot information specifying process and the second jackpot information specifying process, the type determination process is performed even if a jackpot is won in the hit determination process of the hold information which is a target of the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. Is not done. Therefore, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win exists in the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds, the type of the win / loss lottery mode and the support mode that are set after the opening and closing execution mode is affected. Absent. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify the type of the winning / rejecting lottery mode and the support mode set at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

<Another example of the fourth embodiment>
(1) In a situation where “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, a winning / failing determination process is performed by referring to the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode. In the case of winning, the number of rounds to be added may be larger than 6R or 16R. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage of a situation where the winning / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  (2) In the first jackpot information specifying process and the second jackpot information specifying process, when a jackpot is won, a type determination process may be performed. In this configuration, the corresponding flag in the RAM 64 may be set to “1” or the corresponding flag in the RAM 64 may be cleared to “0” according to the type of the jackpot result in the type determination processing. More specifically, in the situation where the 6R normal jackpot result on hold or the 16R normal jackpot result on hold has been set, if the 1R is set to the 6R normal jackpot flag and the in-hold probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, or When "1" is set in the 16R normal jackpot flag and the pending change jackpot flag within the hold, the pending change jackpot flag within the RAM 64 is cleared to "0". If only the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the pending normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. On the other hand, in the situation where the 6R probability change jackpot on hold or the 16R probability change jackpot on hold results, the “1” is set in the 6R probability change jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag on hold in the RAM 64, or the 16R probability change jackpot in the RAM 64 is set. When “1” is set to the flag and the pending normal jackpot flag within the hold, the pending normal jackpot flag within the RAM 64 is cleared to “0”. Also, when “1” is set only in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, “1” is set in the in-hold probable variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64. According to this configuration, it is possible to set a winning / rejecting lottery mode and a support mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result included in the hold information targeted for the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the handling of the hold information acquired during the open / close execution mode. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition process executed in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the open / close execution mode. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2602, and it is determined whether or not the timing at which the variable display of the pattern on the upper operating port display unit 33 or the lower operating port display unit 34 for one game has ended is completed. If it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is the timing at which the variable display has ended, it is determined in step S2603 whether the result of the game round ended this time corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag, the 6R probability variable jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64. As described above, when a big hit is won in response to the winning in the upper operating port 23, “1” is set to one of the 6R normal big hit flag and the 6R certain variable big hit flag. In addition, when the jackpot is won with the winning in the lower operation port 24, “1” is set to one of the 16R normal jackpot flag and the 16R certain variable jackpot flag. If it does not correspond to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the present game state shift processing is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2603, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not "1" is set in the 6R normal big hit flag or 6R certain variable big hit flag in the RAM 64.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, "6" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2605, and the opening of the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is performed. "1000" is set as the waiting period for The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the opening waiting period is 2 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2604, "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2606, and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set. Is set to "1000" as a waiting period for opening.

  When the processing in step S2605 or the processing in step S2606 is performed, it is determined in step S2607 whether the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. The extension flag is a flag for specifying whether or not to generate a continuous effect as if the open / close execution mode is continued after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a determination process for determining whether or not to generate the continuous effect during the open / close execution mode is performed, and the continuous effect is generated in the determination process. If it is determined, “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. By setting "1" to the extension flag, it becomes possible to perform a process corresponding to the case where the continuous effect is generated. The processing (Steps S2619 and S2620) in the case where an affirmative determination is made in Step S2607 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2607, an opening command is set in step S2608, and the game state transition processing ends. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect setting process for the open / close execution mode. According to the set effect pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

  Next, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 reads a data table from the program ROM 103 for performing the present opening / closing execution mode effect on the symbol display device 31 based on the received opening / closing execution mode command, and determines a data table in advance according to the data table. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 every time the image update timing comes (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thus, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90. The data table is an information group in which, when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the display screen G, processing required to display an image of one frame at each update timing of the image is defined. is there.

  Specifically, in the effect at the time of opening when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, a character is displayed on the display screen G and “round game is started” is displayed adjacent to the character. You. This makes it possible for the player to easily specify that the round game is started.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S2609. The special winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening / closing process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 22a is being opened. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, it is determined in step S2702 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent a process of opening the special winning opening 22a, which will be described later, from being performed in a situation where no trigger for opening the special winning opening 22a has occurred. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent a process of opening the special winning opening 22a, which will be described later, from being performed when the timer counter T is not “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends.

  If the round counter RC is not "0" and the timer counter T is "0", a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S2704. In the special winning opening opening process, first, “10” is set as an upper limit number which is an end condition of one round game in a winning upper limit counter PC provided in various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. The winning upper limit counter PC is, as described above, a counter for specifying the upper limit number, which is an end condition of one round game, by the MPU 62.

  Next, "15000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the subtraction process is performed by one every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” approximately 30 sec after the timer counter T is set to “15000”.

  Next, release execution processing is executed. In the opening execution process, the variable winning drive unit 22c is drive-controlled so that the special winning opening 22a is opened. Thereafter, the main winning opening process is ended.

  If the processing in step S2704 has been executed, an open command is set in step S2705, and the main winning opening / closing processing ends. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60, the sound emission control device 90 first executes the emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a, and controls the output of the speaker unit 55. Execute

  Next, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 100 so that the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the special winning opening 22a has been started. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received release command. Thus, an effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a is displayed on the display screen G.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2701 that the special winning opening 22a is being opened, the flow advances to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the opening duration of the current special winning opening 22a has elapsed. Is determined.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2706, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the gaming ball has won the special winning opening 22a. If no gaming ball has been won in the special winning opening 22a, the main winning opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by "1" in step S2708. In a succeeding step S2709, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2709, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, a closing execution process is executed in step S2710. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c is ended so that the special winning opening 22a is closed. In a succeeding step S2711, a close command is set. The closing command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the close command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound light emission control device 90 first executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the closing of the special winning opening 22a, and controls the output of the speaker unit 55. Execute

  Next, a closing command is transmitted to the display control device 100 to make the display control device 100 recognize that the closing of the special winning opening 22a has been started. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received closing command. Thereby, an effect corresponding to the time when the special winning opening 22a is closed is displayed on the display screen G.

  When the process of step S2711 is executed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by 1 in step S2712. In subsequent step S2713, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2713, a notification specifying process is executed in step S2714. The notification specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The notification specifying process is a process for specifying whether or not to generate various notification effects described later during a round game. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the notification specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal big hit flag or the 6R certain variable big hit flag of the RAM 64. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the on-hold success / failure determination process is performed differs according to the number of rounds corresponding to the current jackpot result. The in-hold success / failure determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the acquired hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. The details of the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing will be described later. By providing the processing of step S2801, it is possible to make the timing at which the on-hold success / failure determination processing is performed different depending on the number of rounds corresponding to the current jackpot result.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined in step S2802 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "4". If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the present notification specifying process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined in step S2803 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "11". If a negative determination is made in step S2803, the present notification specifying process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, it is determined in step S2804 whether the first start reserved ball count NA and the second start reserved ball count NB are “0”. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the present notification specifying process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2804, the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process is executed in step S2805. The on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the on-hold success / failure determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the acquired on-hold information includes the on-hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the second starting suspension ball count NB is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, a second holding appropriateness determination process is performed in step S2902. The second holding approval / disapproval determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The second holding approval / disapproval determination process is a process for performing the holding / non-acceptance determination process for the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the hold information that can be stored in each of the hold areas Ra and Rb is set to four. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second holding appropriateness determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3001, a collision determination process is performed. This hit determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the hit / fail judgment processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3101, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Specifically, in the case of the success / failure determination processing executed in step S3001, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb is grasped.

  In step S3102, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the 6R normal big hit flag or the 16R normal big hit flag of the RAM 64. If the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R normal jackpot result, “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, and the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is 16R. When a normal jackpot result is obtained, "1" is set to the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64. As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of the hit / fail table referred to in the hit / fail judgment processing is different between the case of the 6R / 16R normal jackpot result and the case of the 6R / 16R probability-change jackpot result. Therefore, by providing the processing in step S3102, it is possible to perform the hit / fail judgment processing with reference to the hit / fail table corresponding to the jackpot result that has triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S3101 is included in the value corresponding to the jackpot winning in step S3103 with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode. Is determined. Thereafter, the true / false determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3102, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S3101 is included in the value corresponding to the jackpot winning in step S3104 with reference to the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. Is determined. Thereafter, the true / false determination processing ends.

  Returning to the description of the second holding success / failure determination process (FIG. 41), if a big hit has been won in the process of step S3103 or step S3104 (step S3002: YES), the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in step S3003. Is set, and the second holding approval / disapproval determination processing ends. The extension flag is, as described above, a flag for specifying whether or not to generate a continuous effect as if the open / close execution mode is continued after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, it is determined in step S3004 whether or not the second start pending ball count NB is greater than “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S3004, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, the processing in steps S3005 to S3007 is performed. The processing of steps S3005 to S3007 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3003. However, in the hit / fail judgment processing executed in step S3005, the second holding area Rb2 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not the second starting suspension ball count NB is greater than “2”. If a negative determination is made in step S3008, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3008, the processing in steps S3009 to S3011 is performed. The processing of steps S3009 to S3011 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3003. However, in the hit / fail judgment processing executed in step S3009, the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3010, it is determined in step S3012 whether or not the second starting suspended ball count NB is greater than “3”. If a negative determination is made in step S3012, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3012, the processing in step S3013 is performed. The processing in step S3013 is the same as the processing in step S3001. However, in the hit / fail determination processing executed in step S3013, the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  In a succeeding step S3014, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If a negative determination is made in step S3014, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3014, “1” is set to the hold consecutive flag in the RAM 64 in step S3015, and the second hold success / failure determination process ends. The hold consecutive flag is a flag for specifying whether or not to generate an effect of notifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold.

  According to this configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, the RAM 64 is extended. When the flag is set to "1" and the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the hold flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” is set. Although the details will be described later, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information for winning the big hit is stored in the open / close execution mode, and the open / close execution is performed. After the mode ends, a continuous effect occurs as if the open / close execution mode is continuing. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64, a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information for winning the jackpot in the open / close execution mode is stored. Later, the continuous effect does not occur. Here, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the game time is reduced until the game time is executed three times after the end of the open / close execution mode. That is, the variable display time of the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb is shortened, but the change display time of the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb is reduced. The variable display time of the stored hold information is not shortened. Therefore, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, it takes time until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. If the time until the round game is started becomes longer in the situation where the continuous effect is generated, it becomes impossible to make the player think that the round game has been extended. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb includes hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the hold flag is not “1” instead of the extension flag of the RAM 64. Is set. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being unable to make the player think that the round game has been extended.

  Further, according to this configuration, when the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb includes the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, the holding flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". Although the continuous effect does not occur, the above-described notification effect occurs. Here, since the player expects the opening / closing execution mode to be continued, if the above-described continuous effect does not occur, the player is disappointed. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the notification effect is generated even in a situation where the continuous effect does not occur, so that it is possible to suppress the disappointment that the continuous effect does not occur.

  Returning to the description of the on-hold / non-hold determination process (FIG. 40), when the process of step S2902 is executed, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag or on-hold flag in the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, the on-line rejection determination process ends.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second holding area Rb includes the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning, the first holding success / failure determination process described later is not performed. The first hold approval / disapproval determination process is a process for performing a hold determination process for the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in the open / close execution mode. By providing the processing in step S2903, it is possible to prevent the first holding success / failure determination processing described below from being performed in a situation where the second holding area Rb includes the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Becomes possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2903, it is determined in step S2904 whether or not “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the on-line pending / incoming determination process ends.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R probability-change jackpot result or the 16R probability-change jackpot result, the first hold success / failure determination process described later is performed. Absent. Therefore, by providing the process of step S2904, when the type of the jackpot result which has triggered the shift of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R certain-change big-hit result or the 16R certain-change big-hit result, the first holding right / wrong determination process described later is performed. It is possible to prevent that being done.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2904, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the first start pending ball count NA is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, the on-line rejection determination process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2905, a first hold appropriateness determination process is executed in step S2906. Although the details will be described later, in the first holding approval / disapproval determination processing, the approval / disapproval determination processing is performed on the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra during the open / close execution mode.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not “1” is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2907, the on-hold rejection determination process is terminated. Here, the case where a negative determination is made in step S2907 is a case where the type of the jackpot result that has triggered the shift of the open / close execution mode is the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result. In the present embodiment, when the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the first hold win / fail determination processing is performed on the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Absent. On the other hand, if the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, if the suspension information is stored in the first suspension area Ra, the first suspension success / failure determination process for the suspension information is performed. Is performed. Therefore, by providing the process of step S2907, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the first suspension right / wrong determination process according to the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift to the open / close execution mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2907, the first hold application / non-execution determination process is executed in step S2906, and the main hold application determination process ends. The first holding approval / disapproval determination process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the first holding approval / disapproval determination process is a process for performing the approval / disapproval determination process for the hold information stored in the first holding area Ra in the open / close execution mode. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the first holding approval / disapproval determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3201, a hit / fail determination process is executed. Specific processing is the same as step S3001. However, in the hit / fail judgment processing executed in step S3201, the first reservation area Ra1 of the first reservation area Ra is targeted.

  In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not a big hit has been won in the hit / fail determination processing executed in step S3201. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, “1” is set in the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64 in step S3203, and the first hold success / failure determination process ends. As described above, the hold consecutive flag is used to specify whether or not to cause the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 to generate an effect for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold. Flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether the first start pending ball count NA is greater than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3204, the first holding right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the processing in steps S3205 to S3207 is executed. Steps S3205 to S3207 are the same as steps S3201 to S3203. However, in the hit determination processing executed in step S3205, the second holding area Ra2 of the first holding area Ra is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3206, it is determined in step S3208 whether the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “2”. If a negative determination is made in step S3208, the first holding authorization determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, the processing in steps S3209 to S3211 is performed. Steps S3209 to S3211 are the same as steps S3201 to S3203. However, in the hit / fail judgment processing executed in step S3209, the third holding area Ra3 of the first holding area Ra is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3210, it is determined in step S3212 whether the first start pending ball count NA is greater than "3". If a negative determination is made in step S3212, the first suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3212, the processing in steps S3213 to S3215 is performed. The processing of steps S3213 to S3215 is the same as the processing of steps S3201 to S3203. However, in the hit / fail judgment processing executed in step S3213, the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra is targeted.

  According to this configuration, when the first hold area Ra1 to the fourth hold area Ra4 of the first hold area Ra include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, “1” is set to the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64. Is done. Here, before the open / close execution mode ends and before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed, the hold information may be stored in the second hold area Rb. There is. In the present embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially digested before the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, there is a possibility that the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb may be consumed before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the game times is reduced until the game times are executed three times after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the number of times is four or more, the fluctuation display time of the game number is not reduced. Therefore, when the first hold area Ra1 to the fourth hold area Ra4 of the first hold area Ra include hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Then, when a continuous effect as if the open / close execution mode is continuing occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode, it may take time before the round game is started. In this case, it is impossible to make the player think that the round game has been extended. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the first hold area Ra1 to the fourth hold area Ra4 of the first hold area Ra include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the RAM 64 is not replaced by the extension flag of the RAM 64. Since the hold flag is set to “1”, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to make the player feel as if the round game has been extended.

  When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified, the hit determination processing that is to be performed after the hold information is not performed. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a notification effect is generated at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified, informing that the hold information for winning the jackpot is stored. Here, if it is configured that even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is specified, the winning / failing determination process is performed in the other hold information, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the other hold information. Since the notification effect also occurs when it is specified that the notification effect is performed, the notification effect is generated a plurality of times in one open / close execution mode. In this case, since it is specified to the player that a plurality of pieces of hold information to be a jackpot win are stored in the hold information, the jackpot win is included in the hold information in order to allow the player to perform the next opening / closing execution mode. Can not be excited by whether or not the hold information corresponding to is stored. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified, the hit / fail determination processing that is to be performed later than the hold information is not performed, so the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win Is not specified by the player. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot play with the open / close execution mode in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold information and makes it impossible for the player to play. Become.

  When the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R certain-change big-hit result or the 16R certain-change big-hit result, the first holding area Ra is not set as the target of the holding success / failure determination process. If the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R-variable jackpot result or the 16R-variable jackpot result, the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will occur in the lower operating port 24 than in the upper operating port 23. In addition, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially consumed before the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, in the situation where the type of the jackpot result which has triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R certain jackpot result or the 16R certain jackpot result, the first holding success / failure determination process is performed even though the first holding success / failure determination process is performed. There is a possibility that the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, which has been subjected to the hold determination processing, may not be set as an execution trigger of the game for a long time. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, in the case where the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R probability-change jackpot result or the 16R probability-change jackpot result, the first hold success / failure determination process is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra targeted for the first suspension right / wrong determination processing from being set as an opportunity to execute the game for a long time. It becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of the notification specifying process (FIG. 39), when the process of step S2805 is executed, it is determined in step S2806 whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, a round game extension notification command is set in step S2807, and the notification specification processing ends. The round game extension notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the above-mentioned round game extension notification command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the round game extension notification command, and also executes the speaker unit 55. Execute output control.

  Next, the round game extension notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is. Here, the processing of the display control device 100 corresponding to the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a display control process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 has received the round game extension notification command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3301: YES), the first notification setting process is performed in step S3302. Execute Specifically, information for displaying an image notifying that the extension of the round game has been determined is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the image is displayed on the display screen G. The image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram for describing an image that notifies that the extension of the round game has been determined.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), an image “Round game extension confirmed!” Is displayed on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the round game will be extended.

  Returning to the description of the notification specifying process (FIG. 39), when a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2808 whether or not “1” is set in the pending consecutive flag of the RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the present notification specifying process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, a suspended continuous notification command is set in step S2809. The hold continuous notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the above-mentioned suspended continuous notification command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the suspended continuous notification command and outputs the output of the speaker unit 55. Execute control. Next, the hold continuous notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As illustrated in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 has received the above-mentioned suspended continuous notification command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3303: YES), the display control device 100 performs the setting process for the second notification in step S3304. Execute. Specifically, information for displaying an image for notifying that the acquired hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, the image is displayed on the display screen G. The image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is an explanatory diagram for describing an image that notifies that the acquired suspension information includes the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), on the display screen G, an image of “there is a hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning within the hold!” Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to be informed easily that the acquired hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Returning to the description of the special winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 38), when the process of step S2714 is executed, “500” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S2715, and The special winning opening opening and closing process ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T in this process is numerical information for opening standby until the variable winning device 22 is changed from the open state to the closed state and subsequently to the open state again. At 10, 1 sec is set.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2713, the ending process is executed in step S2716. The ending process will be described with reference to FIG. The ending process is a process performed when the upper limit number of round games has been completed. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending process executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60.

  First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag or the pending consecutive flag of the RAM 64. In the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win cannot be identified in the hold success / failure determination process executed in the specific number of rounds, the hold success / failure determination process is performed again at the end of the round game. . Therefore, by providing the processing of step S3401, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is specified in the hold success / failure determination processing executed in the specific number of rounds, the hold success / failure determination processing is performed again. Can be prevented.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined in step S3402 whether the first start-reserved ball count NA and the second start-reserved ball count NB are “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, then a pending success / failure determination process is executed in step S3403. As described above, the on-hold success / failure determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the acquired on-hold information includes the on-hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. The specific processing contents are the same as the processing in step S2805.

  According to the present embodiment, the pending hit determination processing is performed not only at the time of the specific round number but also at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times. Since it is possible to acquire the hold information even during the round game, new hold information is obtained from the time when the in-hold success / failure determination processing is performed for a specific number of rounds to the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times Could be done. Therefore, by performing the determination of success / failure in hold at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold information until the end of the round game. It is possible to cause the player to perform a round game while expecting a game.

  In one open / close execution mode, the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process for the same hold information may be executed a plurality of times. Here, if it is configured that the above-mentioned on-hold information determination processing is performed only once in the same on-hold information, the on-hold information determined as the on-hold information determination processing executed in a specific number of rounds is stored in the RAM 64. You need to remember. In this regard, according to the present configuration, in one open / close execution mode, the on-hold success / failure determination processing for the same on-hold information can be performed a plurality of times, so the on-hold success / failure determination processing executed in a specific number of rounds Is not required to be stored in the RAM 64. This makes it possible to prevent the capacity of the RAM 64 from becoming too large.

  After executing the processing in step S3403, it is determined in step S3404 whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag or the pending consecutive flag of the RAM 64. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3402 or a negative determination is made in step S3404, a normal ending command is set in step S3405. The normal ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the normal ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes a normal ending corresponding process. In the normal ending correspondence processing, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 during the normal ending and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

  Next, the content of the success / failure lottery result included in the normal ending command received this time is specified, and a process for determining the content of the normal ending effect corresponding to the content of the success / failure lottery result is executed. After executing the normal ending processing, the normal ending command corresponding to the processing result of the normal ending processing is transmitted to the display control device 100.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the normal ending command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S3305: YES), the data table for normal ending corresponding to the normal ending command in step S3306 From the program ROM 103. The display control device 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec) according to the normal ending data table. Thus, the normal ending effect determined by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 is executed. In the case of the normal ending effect when the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", "jump" is displayed on the display screen G, and the 6R certain variable jackpot flag or 16R of the RAM 64 is displayed. In the above normal ending effect when “1” is set in the probability change jackpot flag, “one more time” is displayed on the display screen G.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 46), if a positive determination is made in step S3401, or if a positive determination is made in step S3404, it is determined in step S3406 whether the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". judge. In the present embodiment, the ending effect is different between the case where the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” and the case where the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3406, it is possible to execute an ending effect corresponding to the flag in which “1” is set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3406, a first special ending command is set in step S3407. The first special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the first special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes a first special ending corresponding process. In the first special ending handling process, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of the first special ending and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are performed.

  Next, a process for determining the content of the first special ending effect corresponding to the first special ending command received this time is executed. After executing the first special ending processing, the first special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the first special ending processing is transmitted to the display control device 100.

  As illustrated in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the first special ending command from the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 (step S3307: YES), the display control device 100 determines in step S3308 that the first special ending command corresponds to the first special ending command. (1) The data table for the special ending is read from the program ROM 103. The display control device 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 every time a predetermined image update timing comes (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec) according to the first special ending data table. As a result, the first special ending effect determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 is executed.

  The image displayed in the first special ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for describing an image displayed in the first special ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, “extended next round game” is displayed on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the round game will be extended.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 46), if a negative determination is made in step S3406, a second special ending command is set in step S3408. The case where a negative determination is made in step S3406 is a case where “1” is set in the pending consecutive flag of the RAM 64. The second special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the second special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes a second special ending corresponding process. In the second special ending correspondence processing, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 during the second special ending and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

  Next, a process for determining the content of the second special ending effect corresponding to the second special ending command received this time is executed. After executing the second special ending processing, the second special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the second special ending processing is transmitted to the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 receives the second special ending command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3309: YES), the display control device 100 determines in step S3310 that the second special ending command corresponds to the second special ending command. 2. Read a data table for special ending from the program ROM 103. The display control device 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec) according to the data table for the second special ending. As a result, the second special ending effect determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 is executed.

  An image displayed in the second special ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is an explanatory diagram for describing an image displayed in the second special ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), "next hold reams" is displayed on the display screen G. This makes it possible to easily notify the player that the acquired suspension information includes the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  According to the present embodiment, a plurality of timings at which a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information for winning the jackpot in one open / close execution mode is stored are set. Here, in a configuration in which the in-hold / non-permission determination processing is performed a plurality of times during one open / close execution mode, if the timing at which the notification effect occurs is set to one, the player generates the notification effect. Depending on whether or not, only one timing can be excited. In this regard, according to this configuration, the notification effect may occur not only at the specific number of rounds but also at the end of the upper limit number of round games. As a result, the number of opportunities to be thrilled by whether or not the notification effect is generated increases, so that the player can be more entertained.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 46), when the process of step S3405 is executed, when the process of step S3407 is executed, or when the process of step S3408 is executed, the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are stored in step S3409. “2000” is set in the provided timer counter T as a waiting period for ending, and the ending process ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the waiting period for ending is 4 sec. However, the waiting period is optional.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 37), when the processing of step S2609 is executed, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. I do. If a negative determination is made in step S2610, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, it is determined in step S2611 whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2611, the present game state transition processing is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2611, a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is performed in step S2612. Specifically, in a situation where the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, if the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the high probability mode of the RAM 64 is set. The flag is set to “1”, and when the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the state is maintained. If “1” is not set in the high-frequency support flag of the RAM 64, “1” is set in the high-frequency support flag of the RAM 64, and “1” is set in the high-frequency support flag of the RAM 64. , Maintain that state.

  On the other hand, in a situation where “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 and the “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, the high probability mode flag is set to “0”. If "1" is not set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, the state is maintained. If the high-frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the high-frequency support flag is cleared to “0”. If the high-frequency support flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, Maintain state.

  When the process of step S2612 is executed, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S2613. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2613, a round game extension standby command is set in step S2614. The round game extension standby command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that the process shifts to the round game extension standby period after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is done. The extended waiting period of the round game is an image as if the round game is extended on the display screen G from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning are consumed. Period.

  When receiving the round game extension standby command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the round game extension standby command, and also executes the speaker unit 55. Execute output control. Next, the round game extension standby command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 has received the round game extension standby command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3311: YES), the data table for the extension standby period is determined in step S3312. From the program ROM 103. The display control device 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 each time a predetermined image update timing comes (for example, at a period of 20 msec) according to the data table for the extended standby period. Thereby, an effect for the extended waiting period of the round game is executed on the display screen G. Here, an image displayed in the extended standby period of the round game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram for describing an image displayed in the extended standby period of the round game.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), "Preparing for an extended round game" is displayed on the display screen G. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that it is the waiting time until the extended round game is started.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 37), if a negative determination is made in step S2613, it is determined in step S2615 whether or not “1” is set in the pending consecutive flag of the RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2615, the pending consecutive flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S2616.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2615, or if the process in step S2616 is performed, the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" in step S2617. The number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed since the opening / closing execution mode was terminated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Each time a later-described change start process is performed, the game number counter is incremented by "1".

  In the following step S2618, among the 6R normal big hit flag, the 6R certain variable big hit flag, the 16R normal big hit flag, and the 16R certain variable big hit flag, the flag in which "1" is set is cleared to "0", and this game state transition processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the processing (the processing of steps S2619 and S2620) performed when the processing of step S2607 is determined to be positive will be described. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, a round game extension start command is set in step S2619. The round game extension start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the round game extension start command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the audio emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in accordance with the effect pattern for the opening and closing execution mode for the extension, The output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. Next, the round game extension start command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the display control device 100 has received the round game extension start command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S3313: YES), the display control device 100 transmits the round game extension start command in step S3314. A corresponding data table for the extended open / close execution mode is read from the program ROM 103. The display control device 100 outputs a drawing list to the VDP 105 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec) according to the data table for the extended open / close execution mode. Thus, an effect for the extended opening / closing execution mode is executed on the display screen G. Here, an image displayed on the display screen G when the extended opening / closing execution mode is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram for describing an image displayed when the extended opening / closing execution mode is started.

  As shown in FIG. 48B, “Extended round game started!” Is displayed on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the extended round game has started.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 37), when the processing of step S2619 is executed, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” in step S2620, and the game state transition processing ends.

  According to the present embodiment, during the opening / closing execution mode, the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is performed. After the end of the round game corresponding to the jackpot result which triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the display screen G displays “Preparing for an extended round game”. Then, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is exhausted, “extended round game start!” Is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the round game has been extended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Change start processing>
The change start process executed in step S505 of the game times control process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variation start processing executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60.

  First, the processing of steps S3501 to S3508 is the same as the processing of steps S701 to S708, and the processing of step S3510 is the same as the processing of step S709. When the process in step S3508 is executed, the jackpot winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by one in step S3509. The jackpot winning number counter is a counter for specifying the number of jackpot winnings in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. The jackpot winning number counter is cleared to “0” by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

  When the processing in step S3509 or the processing in step S3510 is performed, the number of games counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is incremented by "1" in step S3511. As described above, the number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed since the opening / closing execution mode has been completed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In a succeeding step S3512, a variable display time related process is executed. The variable display time related processing will be described with reference to FIG. The variable display time-related process is a process performed to set a variable display time of a picture in the upper operating port display unit 33 and the lower operating port display unit 34. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variable display time-related processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. The jackpot winning number counter is, as described above, a counter for specifying the number of jackpot winnings in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Each time a big hit is won, the big hit winning number counter is incremented by one.

  Here, if the number of jackpot winnings since the game of the pachinko machine 10 was started is 0, the variable display time is set by referring to the variable type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Is done. On the other hand, when the number of jackpot winnings is one or more, a predetermined variable display time is set until the number of game times reaches the predetermined number. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3601, it is possible to prevent a predetermined variable display time from being set in a situation where the number of jackpot winnings is zero.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3601, it is determined in step S3602 whether the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is less than "4". As described above, the number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying the number of game times executed since the opening / closing execution mode has been completed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Each time the game is executed, the game number counter is incremented by one.

  In the present embodiment, if the number of wins from the start of the game of the pachinko machine 10 is one or more, the predetermined variable display time is set on condition that the number of game times is less than four. Is set. Therefore, by providing the processing of step S3602, in the situation where the number of jackpot winnings is one or more, if the number of game times is four or more, a predetermined variable display time is set. Can be prevented.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, “250” is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S3603, and the variable display time related processing ends. The numerical information set in the variable display time counter is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. That is, it becomes “0” approximately 0.5 sec after the numerical information is set in the variable display time counter. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 0.5 sec is set to the shortest in the variable display time. However, the minimum value of the variable display time is not limited to 0.5 sec, and is a period from the display of “Preparing for round game” on the display screen G to the start of the next round game. The shortest variable display time is arbitrary as long as the player is not considered long. In addition, the numerical information set in the variable display time counter in step S3603 is not limited to the configuration that is the shortest among the variable display times set in the pachinko machine 10, and as described above, It is arbitrary as long as the period from displaying "round game preparation" on the display screen G to the start of the next round game is not considered long by the player.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, or if a negative determination is made in step 3602, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S3604, and the variable display time-related process ends. In the process of setting the variable display time, numerical information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  According to the present embodiment, the upper limit number of game times in which the fluctuating display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to three times. Therefore, when the number of game times executed after the end of the open / close execution mode is four or more, the variable display time is not set to the shortest. Thereby, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the second hold area Rb, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to all the hold information from ending in a short period of time. It becomes. Further, according to this configuration, since the game round triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is executed for a long time, new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb during that time. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a situation in which the hold information is not stored in the second hold area Rb occurs. Here, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is more advantageous than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. According to the configuration in which the upper limit of the number of games to be set, in which the variable display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec after the opening / closing execution mode is set to three, as described above, the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation where no data is stored, it is difficult to disadvantage the player.

  Even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is not included in the hold information acquired until the round game of the maximum number of times ends, the variable display time is the shortest 0.5 seconds after the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Is set to Here, if a notification effect notifying that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the obtained hold information does not occur, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the obtained hold information. That the held information is not included is specified by the player. In this case, the player has to digest the game times specified as not winning the jackpot. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is not included in the hold information acquired until the upper limit number of round games ends, the hold information changes after the opening and closing execution mode ends. The display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec. Thereby, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration for having to wait for a long time until the game times specified as not winning the jackpot are consumed.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 49), when the process of step S3512 is executed, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the change command and the type command are not set. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3513, it is possible to prevent the setting of the variation command and the type command when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1".

  If a negative determination is made in step S3513, a variation command and a type command are set in step S3514. The variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 12). Based on the received variation command and the type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether the type of the jackpot result is any of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot result, the 16R normal jackpot result, and the 16R probability variable jackpot result. Determine if there is.

  If it is any of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot result, the 16R probability variable jackpot result, and the 16R probability variable jackpot result, a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, first, when the type of the jackpot result this time is the 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on one activated line L1 to L5. Is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of the even symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  When the type of the jackpot result of this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot result and the 16R probability variable jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of odd symbols is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is used. Determined as the information of the stop result. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  Also, if the current game result is a miss result, a miss symbol determination process is executed. Specifically, based on the content of the fluctuation command, it is determined whether or not the game time is related to the occurrence of the missed reach display, and if the game time is related to the occurrence of the missed reach display, one active line is determined. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the combination type of the out-of-reach reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined. In addition, when it is not the game time related to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the out-of-reach reach symbol combination is also stopped. The information corresponding to the stop result that is not displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  Next, based on the received command for change and the type command, the effect pattern of the game times related to the start of the change is determined. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90 in advance, the effect continuation period corresponding to the fluctuation command and the type command received this time is selected, and the effect Select the content. The MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 in the game time related to the start of the change in accordance with the determined effect pattern.

  Next, the display control device 100 displays a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of the jackpot result or the symbol determination processing for departure, and a pattern command corresponding to the effect pattern of the game time related to the start of the change. Send to

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for performing the effect for the game round relating to the start of the change on the symbol display device 31 based on the received stop result command and the pattern command. The drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time a predetermined image update timing is set according to the table (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 31, the effect for the game round is executed in accordance with the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally displayed as a stop. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is not set to “1”, the effect for the game is executed on the display screen G in accordance with the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. Is done. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect for the game is different depending on the number of times of the game executed after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  Specifically, until the number of times of the game executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is three, a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen G without a symbol change display or a reach effect. After the end of the opening / closing execution mode, after the number of times of the game executed is four or more, a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen G after the fluctuation display of the symbol or the reach effect occurs.

  On the other hand, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the process of step S3514 is not performed, and thus the variation command and the type command are not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Therefore, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the effect for the game round is not executed on the display screen G.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3513, or if the process in step S3514 is performed, then after changing the display of the pattern in the upper operating port display unit 33 or the lower operating port display unit 34 in step S3515, The fluctuation start processing ends.

  According to this configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the display screen is displayed even if the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display section 33 for the upper working port or the display section 34 for the lower working port. The effect for game round is not performed on G. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the display on the display screen G until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. Preparing for extra round game "is displayed. Here, in a situation where “extended round game is being prepared” is displayed on the display screen G, the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 each time the hold information is consumed. In such a configuration, a symbol variation display and a reach effect are generated on the display screen G, so that even if the next round game is started, it is possible to make the player think that the round game has been extended. I can no longer do it. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the variation command and the type command are not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, so that the next round game is started. Until the display screen G is changed, the display of the symbols does not fluctuate or the reach effect does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which it is not possible to make the player think that the round game has been extended when the next round game is started.

  According to the present embodiment, the ending period is 4 seconds, the extended standby period of the round game is 1.5 seconds at the longest, and the opening period is 2 seconds. In other words, it takes 7.5 seconds at most from the end of the upper limit number of round games and the occurrence of the ending effect on the display screen G to the start of the next round game. Here, as described above, the waiting period between each round game is set to 1 sec. Since the player is accustomed to the time taken from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game being 1 sec, the next round game starts after the end of one round game If it takes 7.5 seconds before it is performed, the user feels that the time is long. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image of “extension of the next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and In the extension standby period, an image of “preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G, and in the opening period, an image of “start of the extended round game!” Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the player is likely to pay attention to the above-described effect different from the normal effect. Therefore, even if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game, the player is not made to feel that the time is long by paying attention to the effect. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the round game from being made to feel as if it has been extended.

<Time chart showing the flow of the game>
The flow of the game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a time chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 51 (a) shows the timing at which the game round corresponding to the jackpot win has ended, FIG. 51 (b) shows the opening period, and FIG. 51 (c) A round game is shown, FIG. 51 (d) shows an ending period, FIG. 51 (e) shows an extended waiting period of the round game, and FIG. 51 (f) shows a game round.

  First, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), at the timing of t1, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is completed, the opening period from the same timing to the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), Occurs. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and "Round game started!" Is displayed adjacent to the character. The opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  Next, from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), a round game of the 1R is performed. At the timing of t3, the 1R round game ends, and after a waiting period (a period from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4) until the next round game is started, from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 As shown in FIG. 51 (c), the 2R round game is performed. The waiting period is set to 1 sec.

  From timing t6 to timing t7, a round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times is performed as shown in FIG. 51 (c). Here, the processing after the ending period will be described by taking, as an example, a case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb. The case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb is a state where the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. When a jackpot is won in the holding success / failure determination process executed in the open / close execution mode, “1” is set to the extension flag of the RAM 64.

  From the timing t7 to the timing t8, an ending period occurs as shown in FIG. 51 (d). During the ending period, an effect at the time of ending is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. "Extended round game" is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the round game will be extended. The ending period is set to 4 seconds.

  At the timing of t8 when the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the extended waiting period of the round game is started. The extended waiting period of the round game is displayed on the display screen G as “preparing for an extended round game” from the end of the opening / closing execution mode to the end of the game corresponding to the jackpot winning. It is a period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), a message “preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that it is the waiting time until the extended round game is started.

  Also, from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the first game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The fluctuation display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game time, a variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operating port display unit 34, and no effect for the game time occurs on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the second game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The fluctuation display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game time, a variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operating port display unit 34, and no effect for the game time occurs on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the third game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The fluctuation display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game time, a variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operating port display unit 34, and no effect for the game time occurs on the display screen G.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a) at the timing of t13, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is completed, an opening period occurs from the same timing to the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 51 (b). I do. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. Minutes round game started! ”Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the extended round game has started. The opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  From the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the 1R round game is performed.

  According to the present embodiment, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image “extended next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and the extension of the round game is waited for. During the period, an image of “preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G, and during the opening period, an image of “start of the extended round game!” Is displayed on the display screen G. Here, in the present embodiment, the ending period is 4 sec, the extended standby period of the round game is 1.5 sec at the longest, and the opening period is 2 sec. In other words, it takes 7.5 seconds at most from the end of the upper limit number of round games and the occurrence of the ending effect on the display screen G to the start of the next round game. As described above, the waiting period between each round game is set to 1 sec, so that the player takes 1 sec from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game. Likely to be used to. In this situation, if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game, the user feels the time to be long. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image of “extension of the next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and In the extension standby period, an image of “preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G, and in the opening period, an image of “start of the extended round game!” Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the player is likely to pay attention to the above-described effect different from the normal effect. Therefore, even if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game, the player is not made to feel that the time is long by paying attention to the effect. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the round game from being made to feel as if it has been extended.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, during the opening / closing execution mode, the hit / fail determination processing for the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is performed. After the end of the round game corresponding to the jackpot result which triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the display screen G displays “Preparing for an extended round game”. Then, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is exhausted, “extended round game start!” Is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the round game has been extended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A plurality of timings at which a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information for winning the jackpot in one open / close execution mode is stored are set. Here, in a configuration in which the in-hold / non-permission determination processing is performed a plurality of times during one open / close execution mode, if the timing at which the notification effect occurs is set to one, the player generates the notification effect. Depending on whether or not, only one timing can be excited. In this regard, according to this configuration, the notification effect may occur not only at the specific number of rounds but also at the end of the upper limit number of round games. As a result, the number of opportunities to be thrilled by whether or not the notification effect is generated increases, so that the player can be more entertained.

  The pending success / failure determination process is performed not only at the time of the specific round number but also at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times. Since it is possible to acquire the hold information even during the round game, new hold information is obtained from the time when the in-hold success / failure determination processing is performed for a specific number of rounds to the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times Could be done. Therefore, by performing the determination of success / failure in hold at the end of the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold information until the end of the round game. It is possible to cause the player to perform a round game while expecting a game.

  In one open / close execution mode, the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process may be performed a plurality of times with the same hold information. Here, if it is configured that the above-mentioned on-hold information determination processing is performed only once in the same on-hold information, the on-hold information determined as the on-hold information determination processing executed in a specific number of rounds is stored in the RAM 64. You need to remember. In this regard, according to the present configuration, during the one open / close execution mode, the pending success / failure determination process can be performed a plurality of times with the same suspension information. There is no need to store the hold information that has been determined in the RAM 64. This makes it possible to prevent the capacity of the RAM 64 from becoming too large.

  When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, “1” is set to the extension flag of the RAM 64. If the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, “1” is set in the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64. You. When the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information for winning the jackpot is stored during the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening / closing is performed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A continuous effect occurs as if the execution mode is continuing. On the other hand, when “1” is set in the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64, a notification effect is generated to notify that the hold information for winning the jackpot in the open / close execution mode is stored. Later, the continuous effect does not occur. Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the game time is reduced until the game time is executed three times after the end of the open / close execution mode. That is, the variable display time of the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb is shortened, but the change display time of the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb is reduced. The variable display time of the stored hold information is not shortened. Therefore, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, it takes time until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. If the time until the round game is started becomes longer in the situation where the continuous effect is generated, it becomes impossible to make the player think that the round game has been extended. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb includes hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the hold flag is not “1” instead of the extension flag of the RAM 64. Is set. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being unable to make the player think that the round game has been extended.

  Further, according to this configuration, when the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb includes the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, the holding flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1". Although the continuous effect does not occur, the above-described notification effect occurs. Here, since the player expects the opening / closing execution mode to be continued, if the above-described continuous effect does not occur, the player is disappointed. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the notification effect is generated even in a situation where the continuous effect does not occur, so that it is possible to suppress the disappointment that the continuous effect does not occur.

  When the first hold area Ra1 to the fourth hold area Ra4 of the first hold area Ra include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, “1” is set to the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64. Here, before the open / close execution mode ends and before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed, the hold information may be stored in the second hold area Rb. There is. In the present embodiment, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially digested before the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, there is a possibility that the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb may be consumed before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the game times is reduced until the game times are executed three times after the end of the open / close execution mode. If the number of times is four or more, the fluctuation display time of the game number is not reduced. Therefore, when the first hold area Ra1 to the fourth hold area Ra4 of the first hold area Ra include hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Then, when a continuous effect as if the open / close execution mode is continuing occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode, it may take time before the round game is started. In this case, it is impossible to make the player think that the round game has been extended. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the first hold area Ra1 to the fourth hold area Ra4 of the first hold area Ra include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the RAM 64 is not replaced by the extension flag of the RAM 64. Since the hold flag is set to “1”, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to make the player feel as if the round game has been extended.

  When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified, the hit determination processing that is to be performed after the hold information is not performed. Here, if it is configured that even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is specified, the winning / failing determination process is performed in the other hold information, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the other hold information. Since the notification effect also occurs when it is specified that the notification effect is performed, the notification effect is generated a plurality of times in one open / close execution mode. In this case, since it is specified to the player that a plurality of pieces of hold information to be a jackpot win are stored in the hold information, the jackpot win is included in the hold information in order to allow the player to perform the next opening / closing execution mode. Can not be excited by whether or not the hold information corresponding to is stored. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified, the hit / fail determination processing that is to be performed later than the hold information is not performed, so the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win Is not specified by the player. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot play with the open / close execution mode in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold information and makes it impossible for the player to play. Become.

  When the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R certain-change big-hit result or the 16R certain-change big-hit result, the first holding area Ra is not set as the target of the holding success / failure determination process. If the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R-variable jackpot result or the 16R-variable jackpot result, the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will occur in the lower operating port 24 than in the upper operating port 23. In addition, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is preferentially consumed before the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. Therefore, in the situation where the type of the jackpot result which has triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R certain jackpot result or the 16R certain jackpot result, the first holding success / failure determination process is performed even though the first holding success / failure determination process is performed. There is a possibility that the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, which has been subjected to the hold determination processing, may not be set as an execution trigger of the game for a long time. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, in the case where the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift of the opening / closing execution mode is the 6R probability-change jackpot result or the 16R probability-change jackpot result, the first hold success / failure determination process is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspension information stored in the first suspension area Ra targeted for the first suspension right / wrong determination processing from being set as an opportunity to execute the game for a long time. It becomes possible.

  After the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the upper limit number of game times in which the variable display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec is set to three times. Therefore, when the number of game times executed after the end of the open / close execution mode is four or more, the variable display time is not set to the shortest. Thereby, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the second hold area Rb, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to all the hold information from ending in a short period of time. It becomes. Further, according to this configuration, since the game round triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is executed for a long time, new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb during that time. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a situation in which the hold information is not stored in the second hold area Rb occurs. Here, as described above, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is more advantageous than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. According to the configuration in which the upper limit of the number of games to be set, in which the variable display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec after the opening / closing execution mode is set to three, as described above, the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation where no data is stored, it is difficult to disadvantage the player.

  Even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is not included in the hold information acquired until the round game of the maximum number of times ends, the variable display time is the shortest 0.5 seconds after the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Is set to If there is no notification effect that indicates that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win has been included, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win must not be included in the acquired hold information. Is specified by the player. In this case, the player has to digest the game times specified as not winning the jackpot. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the hold information obtained after the end of the opening and closing execution mode does not include the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, the variable display time is the shortest after the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Is set to 0.5 sec. Thereby, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration for having to wait for a long time until the game times specified as not winning the jackpot are consumed.

  When the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image of “extended next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and is displayed on the display screen G during the extended standby period of the round game. Then, an image of “preparing for an extended round game” is displayed, and an image of “start of an extended round game!” Is displayed on the display screen G during the opening period. Here, in the present embodiment, the ending period is 4 sec, the extended standby period of the round game is 1.5 sec at the longest, and the opening period is 2 sec. In other words, it takes 7.5 seconds at most from the end of the upper limit number of round games and the occurrence of the ending effect on the display screen G to the start of the next round game. As described above, the waiting period between each round game is set to 1 sec, so that the player takes 1 sec from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game. Likely to be used to. In this situation, if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game, the user feels the time to be long. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an image of “extension of the next round game” is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period, and In the extension standby period, an image of “preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G, and in the opening period, an image of “start of the extended round game!” Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the player is likely to pay attention to the above-described effect different from the normal effect. Therefore, even if it takes 7.5 seconds from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game, the player is not made to feel that the time is long by paying attention to the effect. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the round game from being made to feel as if it has been extended.

  When “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64, even if a variation display of the pattern is performed on the display section 33 for the upper operation port or the display section 34 for the lower operation port, the game times are displayed on the display screen G. Production is not performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the display on the display screen G until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. Preparing for extra round game "is displayed. Here, in a situation where “extended round game is being prepared” is displayed on the display screen G, the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 each time the hold information is consumed. In such a configuration, a symbol variation display and a reach effect are generated on the display screen G, so that even if the next round game is started, it is possible to make the player think that the round game has been extended. I can no longer do it. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the variation command and the type command are not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, so that the next round game is started. Until the display screen G is changed, the display of the symbols does not fluctuate or the reach effect does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which it is not possible to make the player think that the round game has been extended when the next round game is started.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the handling of the hold information acquired during the open / close execution mode. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Second hold pass / fail determination process>
With reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 52, of the second holding approval / disapproval determination process executed in step S2902 in the holding approval / disapproval determination process (FIG. 40). The second holding validity / non-permission determination process is a process for performing a validity / non-permission determination process for the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb in the open / close execution mode. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the second holding approval / disapproval determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3701, a win / fail determination process is executed. Specifically, first, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. In the success / failure determination process executed in step S3701, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Rb1 of the second holding area Rb is grasped.

  Next, when "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning with reference to the winning / non-hitting table for the low probability mode. It is determined whether the value is included.

  On the other hand, when "1" is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / non-hitting table for the high probability mode. It is determined whether or not it is included.

  If the result of the success / failure determination processing executed in step S3701 is a jackpot winning (step S3702: YES), “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S3703, and the second suspension success / failure determination is performed. The process ends. The extension flag is, as described above, for specifying whether or not to generate a continuous effect as if the open / close execution mode continues after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag. The continuous effect is an effect in which “extended round game preparation” is displayed on the display screen G until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined in step S3704 whether the second start-remaining ball count NB is greater than "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3704, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the processing in steps S3705 to S3707 is performed. The processing in steps S3705 to S3707 is similar to the processing in steps S3701 to S3703. However, in the hit determination processing executed in step S3705, the second holding area Rb2 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3706, it is determined in step S3708 whether or not the second start-remaining ball count NB is greater than "2". If a negative determination is made in step S3708, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3708, processing in steps S3709 to S3711 is performed. The processing in steps S3709 to S3711 is similar to the processing in steps S3701 to S3703. However, in the hit determination processing executed in step S3709, the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3710, it is determined in step S3712 whether or not the second starting suspended ball count NB is greater than “3”. If a negative determination is made in step S3712, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the processing in steps S3713 to S3715 is performed. The processing in steps S3713 to S3715 is the same as the processing in steps S3701 to S3703. However, in the hit determination processing executed in step S3713, the fourth holding area Rb4 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  In the present embodiment, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb after the end of the open / close execution mode, “1” is set to the extension flag of the RAM 64. . When the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an effect is displayed on the display screen G indicating “Preparing for an extended round game”, and the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed. This starts the round game. Here, in the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold, when the hold information is consumed, the symbol display is changed on the display screen G rather than on the display screen G. In this case, it is more likely that the player will have a higher feeling of excitement by displaying a message "Preparing for an extended round game" and not displaying the symbol fluctuation display. Therefore, when the hold information acquired during the opening / closing execution mode includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, the display screen G displays “Extended round game preparation” and displays the symbol. Is not generated, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of excitement.

<First hold pass / fail judgment processing>
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 53, of the first hold validity / non-permission determination process executed in step S2906 of the pending validity determination process (FIG. 40). The first holding approval / disapproval determination process is a process for performing the holding / non-acceptance determination process for the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in the open / close execution mode. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the first holding approval / disapproval determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S3801, a win / fail determination process is executed. Specifically, first, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. In the success / failure determination processing executed in step S3801, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra1 of the first reservation area Ra is grasped.

  Next, when "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning with reference to the winning / non-hitting table for the low probability mode. It is determined whether the value is included.

  On the other hand, when "1" is set in the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / non-hitting table for the high probability mode. It is determined whether or not it is included.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process executed in step S3801 is a jackpot winning (step S3802: YES), “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S3803, and the first suspension right / wrong determination is made. The process ends. The extension flag is, as described above, for specifying whether or not to generate a continuous effect as if the open / close execution mode continues after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3802, it is determined in step S3804 whether or not the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S3804, the first holding authorization determination processing ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3804, the processing in steps S3805 to S3807 is executed. The processing of steps S3805 to S3807 is the same as the processing of steps S3801 to S3803. However, in the hit determination processing executed in step S3805, the second holding area Ra2 of the first holding area Ra is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3806, it is determined in step S3808 whether or not the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “2”. If a negative determination is made in step S3808, the first holding authorization determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3808, processing in steps S3809 to S3811 is performed. The processing in steps S3809 to S3811 is the same as the processing in steps S3801 to S3803. However, in the success / failure determination processing executed in step S3809, the third reserved area Ra3 of the first reserved area Ra is targeted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3810, it is determined in step S3812 whether the first start pending ball count NA is greater than “3”. If a negative determination is made in step S3812, the first holding right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3812, the processing in steps S3813 to S3815 is performed. The processing in steps S3813 to S3815 is similar to the processing in steps S3801 to S3803. However, in the hit determination processing executed in step S3813, the fourth holding area Ra4 of the first holding area Ra is targeted.

  In the present embodiment, when the first hold area Ra includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. When the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an effect is displayed on the display screen G indicating “Preparing for an extended round game”, and the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed. This starts the round game. Here, although the details will be described later, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the variable display time is set to the shortest until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed. Is done. In addition, if new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed, the second hold area Rb is stored in the second hold area Rb. Since the stored hold information is digested with higher priority than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, it corresponds to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra. There is a possibility that the time until the held hold information is digested becomes too long. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the variable display time is set to the shortest until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. Therefore, even if new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed, the first hold information is stored. The time until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the use area Ra is consumed is not too long. This makes it possible to set an effect as if the round game had been extended even in a situation where the first holding area Ra contained the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Here, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the first hold area Ra at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed. Before this, the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the second holding area Rb, and the round game is started with the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the second holding area Rb as an opportunity. Also in this case, “Extended round game start!” Is displayed on the display screen G. Therefore, even if the round game is not performed with the trigger of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra, it is possible to make the player think that the extended round game has started. Become.

<Variable display time related processing>
The variable display time-related processing executed in step S3512 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to FIG. The variable display time-related process is a process performed to set a variable display time of a picture in the upper operating port display unit 33 and the lower operating port display unit 34. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variable display time-related processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, it is determined in step S3901 whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. The extension flag is, as described above, for specifying whether or not to generate a continuous effect as if the open / close execution mode is continued after the end of the open / close execution mode in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. It is a flag. The variable display time is set to the shortest time only when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. Therefore, by providing the processing in step S3901, it is possible to prevent the variable display time from being set to the shortest in a situation where “1” is not set in the extension flag of the RAM 64.

  In the present embodiment, after the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs and the round game extension start command is set, the extension flag is cleared to “0”. The round game extension start command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 90 to specify that an opening effect corresponding to the case where “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 is generated. The opening effect is an effect in which “Extended round game start!” Is displayed on the display screen G. By clearing the extension flag to "0" at the timing when the round game extension start command is set, the opening effect corresponding to the case where the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" can be generated. It becomes possible, and when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is specified in the hold success / failure determination processing, "1" can be set to the extension flag again.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set to "250" as the shortest variable display time in step S3902, and the variable display time related processing ends. I do. The numerical information set in the variable display time counter is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the shortest fluctuation display time is set to 0.5 sec. However, the minimum value of the variable display time is not limited to 0.5 sec, and is a period from the display of “Preparing for round game” on the display screen G to the start of the next round game. The shortest variable display time is arbitrary as long as the player is not considered long. In addition, the numerical information set in the variable display time counter in step S3902 is not limited to the shortest among the variable display times set in the pachinko machine 10, and as described above, It is arbitrary as long as the period from displaying "round game preparation" on the display screen G to the start of the next round game is not considered long by the player.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S3903, and the variable display time-related process ends. In the process of setting the variable display time, numerical information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

According to the present embodiment, the variable display time is set to the shortest time only when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode. Here, at the end of the open / close execution mode, if the configuration is such that the variable display time is set to be the shortest even in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not stored in the hold, the game time is executed in that situation. Since the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen G, the player is specified that the game time can be consumed in the shortest time. In this case, even if the time required until the next round game is started after displaying the image "Preparing for the extended round game" on the display screen G is short, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning Has been digested, it may be assumed that the next round game has started. In this regard, according to this configuration, the variable display time is set to the shortest time only when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, so It is not specified to the player that the game can be digested in this time. As a result, even if the time required until the next round game is started after displaying the image “Preparing for the extended round game” on the display screen G is short, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning Has been digested, it is possible to prevent the next round game from being considered to have started.

<Time chart showing the flow of the game>
The flow of the game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a time chart showing the flow of the game. FIG. 55 (a) shows the timing at which the game round corresponding to the jackpot has been completed, FIG. 55 (b) shows the opening period, and FIG. 55 (c) FIG. 55 (d) shows an ending period, FIG. 55 (e) shows an extended waiting period of a round game, and FIG. 55 (f) shows a game round.

  First, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), at the timing of t1, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is completed, the opening period from the same timing to the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), Occurs. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and "Round game started!" Is displayed adjacent to the character. The opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  Next, from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the first R round game is performed. At the timing of t3, the 1R round game ends, and after a waiting period (a period from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4) until the next round game is started, from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the 2R round game is performed. The waiting period is set to 1 sec.

  From the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, a round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times is performed as shown in FIG. 55 (c). Here, the processing after the ending period will be described by taking as an example a case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb. The case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb is a state where the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. When a jackpot is won in the holding success / failure determination process executed in the open / close execution mode, “1” is set to the extension flag of the RAM 64.

  From the timing t7 to the timing t8, an ending period occurs as shown in FIG. During the ending period, an effect at the time of ending is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. "Extended round game" is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the round game will be extended. The ending period is set to 4 seconds.

  At the timing t8 when the ending period ends, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the extended waiting period of the round game is started. The extended waiting period of the round game is displayed on the display screen G as “preparing for an extended round game” from the end of the opening / closing execution mode to the end of the game corresponding to the jackpot winning. It is a period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), a message “preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that it is the waiting time until the extended round game is started.

  Further, from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the first game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The fluctuation display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game time, a variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operating port display unit 34, and no effect for the game time occurs on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the second game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The fluctuation display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game time, a variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operating port display unit 34, and no effect for the game time occurs on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the third game round is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The fluctuation display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec. In the game time, a variation display of the pattern is performed on the lower operating port display unit 34, and no effect for the game time occurs on the display screen G.

  From the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the fourth game time is performed after the open / close execution mode ends. Specifically, a game round corresponding to the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb is performed. The fluctuation display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the change display time of the game times is 0.5 sec until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed. Is set to Therefore, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, the “extended round game preparation” is displayed on the display screen G at the end of the open / close execution mode. Even if "Medium" is displayed, the time required from the display of the image to the start of the next round game does not become too long, so it is not possible to make it seem as if the round game has been extended Can be prevented. This makes it possible to increase the number of situations in which an effect as if the round game had been extended was generated.

  In the present embodiment, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" also when the first suspension area Ra stores the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning. Until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first holding area Ra is consumed, the variable display time of the game times is set to 0.5 sec, and thus temporarily stored in the first holding area Ra. Even if new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the held hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is completed, the hold corresponding to the jackpot win stored in the first hold area Ra is performed. The time before the information is digested does not become too long. This makes it possible to set an effect as if the round game had been extended even in a situation where the first holding area Ra contained the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) at the timing of t15, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is completed, an opening period occurs as shown in FIG. 55 (b) from the same timing to the timing of t16. I do. In the opening period, an effect at the time of opening is performed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, as shown in FIG. Minutes round game started! ”Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the extended round game has started. The opening period is set to 2 seconds.

  Next, from the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the first round round game is performed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the open / close execution mode ends, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb, “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. Set. When the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an effect is displayed on the display screen G indicating “Preparing for an extended round game”, and the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed. This starts the round game. Here, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold, the symbol change is displayed on the display screen G when the hold information is consumed. The configuration in which no display is generated is more likely to increase the player's euphoria. Therefore, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the display “Ground game is being prepared” is displayed on the display screen G, and the symbol variation display is not generated. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the elation of the player.

  If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold at the end of the open / close execution mode, the variable display time is set to the shortest until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. Here, if new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed, the second hold area Rb Since the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is more preferentially digested than the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra can be used. The time until the corresponding hold information is digested may be too long. In this regard, according to the present configuration, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display time until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. Even if new hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is exhausted, since the shortest information is set, The time until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed is not too long. This makes it possible to set an effect as if the round game had been extended even in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win was stored in the first hold area Ra.

  The variable display time is set to the shortest time only when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Here, at the end of the open / close execution mode, if the configuration is such that the variable display time is set to be the shortest even in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not stored in the hold, the game time is executed in that situation. Since the stop symbol is displayed on the display screen G, the player is specified that the game time can be consumed in the shortest time. In this case, even if the time required until the next round game is started after displaying the image "Preparing for the extended round game" on the display screen G is short, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning Has been digested, it may be assumed that the next round game has started. In this regard, according to this configuration, the variable display time is set to the shortest time only when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, so It is not specified to the player that the game can be digested in this time. As a result, even if the time required until the next round game is started after displaying the image “Preparing for the extended round game” on the display screen G is short, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning Has been digested, it is possible to prevent the next round game from being considered to have started.

<Another example of the sixth embodiment>
(1) The extension flag of the RAM 64 may be set to “1” only when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the second hold area Rb. Further, in this configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the first holding area Ra, “1” may be set to the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64. The hold consecutive flag is a flag for specifying whether or not to generate an effect of notifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold. When "1" is set to the hold consecutive flag, it is notified on the display screen G that the hold includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. In addition, when the above-mentioned hold consecutive flag is set to “1”, the fluctuation display time is not set to the shortest, but a numerical value corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. The information is set in a variable display time counter provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. In addition, in the game time when the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, an effect for the game time is executed on the display screen G. The effect for the game round is an effect in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner until the variable display time elapses. When the variable display time has elapsed, a stop symbol is displayed. In the game time in which the reach effect occurs, the symbol variation display is started, and after the reach effect has occurred, the stop symbol is displayed. On the other hand, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, “Preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. . The type of the effect is changed by making the effect until the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed according to the holding areas Ra and Rb in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored. Can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the degree of interest in the effect.

  (2) Even when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not stored at the end of the open / close execution mode, the configuration may be such that the variable display time is set to the shortest. In this case, the configuration may be such that the variable display time of the hold information that has been determined in the hold determination processing is set to the shortest. Here, in the case where the notification effect of notifying that the hold information for winning the jackpot is stored in the open / close execution mode does not occur, the player is notified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not stored in the hold. Will be identified. In this case, the player has to digest the game times that have been specified as not winning the jackpot. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not stored at the end of the open / close execution mode, the fluctuation display time of the hold information that has been determined in the hold success / failure determination processing is minimized. Is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent accumulation of frustration for having to wait for a long time until the game times specified as not winning the jackpot are consumed.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the method of setting the opening period and the ending period. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition processing executed in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 according to the seventh embodiment.

  First, the processing of steps S4001 to S4004 is the same as the processing of steps S2601 to S2604.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, “6” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4005. If a negative determination is made in step S4004, “16” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4006.

  When the processing in step S4005 or the processing in step S4006 is performed, it is determined in step S4007 whether any one of the extension flags in the RAM 64 is set to “1”. In the present embodiment, the RAM 64 is provided with a first extension flag, a second extension flag, and a third extension flag. The first extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb. . The second extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the second hold area R2 of the second hold area Rb. . The third extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb. . In the present embodiment, a method of setting an opening period and an ending period in a case where “1” is set in any of the extension flags and in a case where “1” is not set in any of the extension flags Are different. Therefore, by providing the processing of step S4007, it is possible to set an opening period according to the situation.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb, and the case where the second hold area Rb of the second hold area Rb is stored. The opening period and the time period when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold area Rb2 and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb. Ending period is different. Therefore, by using the above three types of flags, it is possible to set an opening period and an ending period corresponding to the flags.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4007, "1000" is set as the opening standby period in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4008. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the opening waiting period is 2 seconds. However, the waiting period is optional.

  In a succeeding step S4009, an opening command is set, and the game state transition processing ends. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect setting process for the open / close execution mode. According to the set effect pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the open / close execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

  Next, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process to the display control device 100. Thus, an effect at the time of opening when no extension flag is set to “1” on the display screen G is executed. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and "Round game has started!" Is displayed adjacent to the character. This makes it possible for the player to easily specify that the round game is started.

  The processing (Step S4020 to Step S4022) in the case of making a positive determination in Step S4007 will be described later.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S4010. In the special winning opening opening / closing process, when the special winning opening 22a is closed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "1" or more and provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. On condition that the timer counter T is "0", the variable winning device 22 is driven to open the special winning opening 22a.

  When the special winning opening 22a is open, the predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 22a (the timer counter T is "0"), or a predetermined number of game balls have won. (The winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is "0"), the driving state of the variable winning device 22 is stopped, and the special winning opening 22a is closed. After executing the processing for closing the special winning opening 22a, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by one. When the value of the round counter RC decremented by 1 becomes a specific value (when it becomes a specific number of rounds), a notification specifying process is executed. The notification specifying process is a process for specifying whether or not to generate a notification effect during a round game. The notification effect is an effect for notifying that the acquired hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  In the above-described notification specifying process, a pending success / failure determination process is performed to specify that the acquired suspension information includes the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning. In the pending rejection determination process, a first rejection determination process for holding and a second rejection determination process for holding are performed. The first hold approval / disapproval determination process is a process for performing a hold determination process for the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in the open / close execution mode. The second holding approval / disapproval determination process is a process for performing the approval / disapproval determination process for the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb in the open / close execution mode.

  In the above-mentioned hold-in-progress determination process, specifically, when the second start-reserved ball count NB is not “0”, the above-mentioned second hold-in-progress determination process is executed. The specific processing content of the second holding approval / disapproval determination processing will be described later. In the second holding success / failure determination process, in the situation where it is specified that the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not stored in the second holding area Rb, the jackpot result which triggered the shift of the opening / closing execution mode this time. If the type is the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result and the first start-holding ball number NA is larger than “0”, the first holding right / wrong determination processing is executed. The specific processing content of the first hold approval / disapproval determination processing is the same as the processing of step S2906.

  In addition, the second start-holding ball number NB is “0”, and the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result and the first start-holding ball number NA Is larger than "0", the first holding appropriateness determination processing is executed.

  The above-mentioned second holding appropriateness determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second holding appropriateness determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S4101, a win / fail determination process is performed. Specifically, first, the value of the corresponding jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. In the success / failure determination process executed in step S4101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Rb1 of the second reservation area Rb is grasped.

  Next, when "1" is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot winning with reference to the winning / non-hitting table for the low probability mode. It is determined whether the value is included.

  On the other hand, when "1" is set to the 6R probability variable jackpot flag or 16R probability variable jackpot flag of the RAM 64, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / not-hitting table for the high probability mode. It is determined whether or not it is included.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process executed in step S4101 is a jackpot winning (step S4102: YES), “1” is set to the first extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S4103, and the second hold The success / failure determination process ends. As described above, the first extension flag specifies that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb. Is a flag for

  If a negative determination is made in step S4102, it is determined in step S4104 whether or not the second starting suspension ball count NB is greater than “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S4104, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, the process of step S4105 is executed. The processing in step S4105 is the same as the processing in step S4101. However, in the hit / fail judgment processing executed in step S4105, the second holding area Rb2 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  If the result of the success / failure determination processing executed in step S4105 is a jackpot winning (step S4106: YES), “1” is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S4107, and the second suspension success / failure is determined. The determination processing ends. The second extension flag specifies, as described above, that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb. Is a flag for

  If a negative determination is made in step S4106, it is determined in step S4108 whether or not the second starting suspended ball count NB is greater than “2”. If a negative determination is made in step S4108, the second suspension right / wrong determination process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4108, the processing in step S4109 is executed. The process in step S4109 is the same as the process in step S4101. However, in the hit / fail determination processing executed in step S4109, the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb is targeted.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process executed in step S4109 is a jackpot winning (step S4110: YES), “1” is set in the third extension flag of the RAM 64 in step S4111, and the second suspension success / failure is determined. The determination processing ends. As described above, the third extension flag specifies that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb. Is a flag for

  If a negative determination is made in step S4110, the processing of steps S4112 to S4115 is performed. Steps S4112 to S4115 are the same as steps S3012 to S3015.

  Returning to the description of the special winning opening opening and closing process executed in step S4010 of the game state transition process (FIG. 56), after executing the notification specifying process, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 displays " 1000 "is set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for opening standby until the variable prize device 22 changes from the open state to the closed state and then to the open state again. In this embodiment, 2 seconds is set. Is done. However, the waiting period between the round games is not limited to 2 seconds, but is optional.

  When the round counter RC obtained by subtracting 1 becomes “0”, the ending process is executed. The ending process is a process performed when the upper limit number of round games has been completed. The ending process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether "1" has been set in any of the extension flags or the pending consecutive flags. In the present embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win cannot be identified in the hold success / failure determination process executed in the specific number of rounds, the hold success / failure determination process is performed again at the end of the round game. . Therefore, by providing the process of step S4201, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is specified in the hold success / failure determination process executed in the specific number of rounds, the hold success / failure determination process is performed again. Can be prevented.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether the first start reserved ball count NA and the second start reserved ball count NB are “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, a pending success / failure determination process is executed in step S4203. The in-hold success / failure determination process is a process for specifying whether or not the acquired hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. As described above, in the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination processing, if the second starting hold ball count NB is not “0”, the second holding success / failure determination processing is executed. In the second holding success / failure determination process, in the situation where it is specified that the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not stored in the second holding area Rb, the jackpot result which triggered the shift of the opening / closing execution mode this time. If the type is the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result and the first start-holding ball number NA is larger than “0”, the first holding right / wrong determination processing is executed.

  In addition, the second start-holding ball number NB is “0”, and the type of the jackpot result that has caused the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 6R normal jackpot result or the 16R normal jackpot result and the first start-holding ball number NA Is larger than "0", the first holding appropriateness determination processing is executed.

  In subsequent step S4204, it is determined whether "1" is set in any of the extension flags or the pending consecutive flags. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202 or if a negative determination is made in step S4204, “2000” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4205. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, the waiting period for ending is 4 sec. However, the waiting period is optional.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, or if the process in step S4205 is performed, a normal ending command is set in step S4206, and the ending process ends. The normal ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the normal ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes a normal ending corresponding process. In the normal ending correspondence processing, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 during the normal ending and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

Next, the content of the success / failure lottery result included in the normal ending command received this time is specified, and a process for determining the content of the normal ending effect corresponding to the content of the success / failure lottery result is executed. After executing the normal ending processing, the normal ending command corresponding to the processing result of the normal ending processing is transmitted to the display control device 100.
Thereby, a normal ending effect is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, in the case of the normal ending effect in the case where “1” is set in the 6R normal jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64, “split” is displayed on the display screen G, and the 6R of the RAM 64 is displayed. In the above normal ending effect in the case where “1” is set in the probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R variable jackpot flag, “one more time” is displayed on the display screen G.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201 or an affirmative determination is made in step S4204, it is determined in step S4207 whether or not one of the extension flags is set to "1". In the present embodiment, the ending effect and the ending period are different between a case where “1” is set in any of the extension flags and a case where “1” is set in the hold consecutive flag. Therefore, by providing the process of step S4207, it is possible to set an ending effect and an ending period corresponding to a case where "1" is set in any of the flags.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, an ending period setting process is executed in step S4208. The ending period setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The ending period setting process is a process for setting an ending period according to the extension flag in which “1” is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb. The ending period differs between the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb. . FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an ending period setting process executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60.

  First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64. As described above, the first extension flag specifies that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb. Is a flag for

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4301, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set to "400" in step S4302, and the ending period setting processing ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, when the first extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for ending is 0.8 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4301, it is determined in step S4303 whether the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". The second extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the second hold area R2 of the second hold area Rb. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4303, “250” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4304, and the ending period setting processing ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, when the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the ending waiting period is 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4303, “150” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4305, and the ending period setting processing ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, when the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the waiting period for ending is 0.3 sec.

  Returning to the description of the ending process (FIG. 58), when the process of step S4208 has been performed, the first special ending command is set in step S4209, and the ending process ends. The first special ending command includes information on an extension flag in which “1” is set among various extension flags. The first special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the first special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes a first special ending corresponding process. In the first special ending handling process, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of the first special ending and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are performed.

  Next, the content of the first ending effect corresponding to the first special ending command received this time is determined. After executing the first special ending processing, the first special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the first special ending processing is transmitted to the display control device 100. As a result, the first special ending effect is executed on the display screen G for a period corresponding to the extension flag in which “1” is set. The first special ending effect is an effect that is specifically displayed on the display screen G as “extended next round game”. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the round game will be extended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4207, "2000" is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4210, and a second special ending command is set in step S4211. End the ending process. The second special ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). When receiving the second special ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes a second special ending corresponding process. In the second special ending correspondence processing, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the time of the first special ending and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed.

  Next, the content of the second ending effect corresponding to the second special ending command received this time is determined. After executing the second special ending processing, the second special ending command corresponding to the processing result of the second special ending processing is transmitted to the display control device 100. Thereby, the second special ending effect is executed on the display screen G. The second special ending effect is an effect that is specifically displayed on the display screen G as “next hold rendezvous”. This makes it possible to easily understand that the hold information acquired by the player includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 56), after executing the processing of step S4010, the processing of steps S4011 to S4013 is executed. The processing of steps S40111 to S4013 is similar to the processing of steps S2610 to S2612.

  When the process in step S4013 has been performed, it is determined in step S4014 whether or not one of the extension flags is set to “1”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4014, a round game extension standby command is set in step S4015. The round game extension standby command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 90 shifts to the extended standby period of the round game after the end of the open / close execution mode. Is recognized.

  When receiving the round game extension standby command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the round game extension standby command, and also executes the speaker unit 55. Execute output control. Next, the round game extension standby command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is. Thereby, an effect for the extended waiting period of the round game is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, the message “Extended round game is being prepared” is displayed on the display screen G. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that it is the waiting time until the extended round game is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4014, the processing of steps S4016 to S4017 is performed. The processing in steps S4016 to S4017 is similar to the processing in steps S2615 to S2616. If the processing in step S4015 has been executed, if the determination in step S4016 is negative, or if the processing in step S4017 has been executed, the processing in steps S4018 to S4019 is executed. The processing in steps S4018 to S4019 is similar to the processing in steps S2617 to S2618.

  Next, the processing performed when a positive determination is made in step S4007 (the processing in steps S4020 to S4022) will be described.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, an opening period setting process is executed in step S4020. The opening period setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The opening period setting process is a process for setting an opening period according to the extension flag in which “1” is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb. The opening period differs between the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb. . FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the opening period setting process executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60.

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether “1” is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64. As described above, the first extension flag specifies that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first hold area Rb1 of the second hold area Rb. Is a flag for

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set to "350" in step S4402, and the opening period setting processing ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, when the first extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the opening waiting period is 0.7 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4401, it is determined in step S4403 whether the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”. The second extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the second hold area R2 of the second hold area Rb. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, “250” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4404, and the opening period setting process ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Therefore, when the second extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1", the opening standby period is 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4403, “100” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S4405, and the opening period setting process ends. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started. Accordingly, the opening standby period when the third extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” is 0.2 sec.

  Here, when "1" is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is 0.8 sec, and the opening period is 0.7 sec. When "1" is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64, the extension waiting period of the round game is 0.5 sec. The extended waiting period of the round game is displayed on the display screen G as “preparing for an extended round game” from the end of the opening / closing execution mode to the end of the game corresponding to the jackpot winning. It is a period. The 0.5 second extension standby period of the round game is 0.5 sec from the end of the opening / closing execution mode to the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning. When the first extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is 2 seconds.

  When “1” is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is 0.5 sec, and the opening period is 0.5 sec. When “1” is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64, the extension waiting period of the round game is 1 second. When “1” is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is 2 seconds.

  When “1” is set in the third extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is 0.3 sec, and the opening period is 0.2 sec. When “1” is set in the third extension flag of the RAM 64, the extension waiting period of the round game is 1.5 seconds. When "1" is set in the third extension flag of the RAM 64, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is 2 seconds.

  According to the present embodiment, when any one of the extension flags is set to “1”, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is the waiting time between the round games. Be the same. Here, if the total time is not the same as the waiting period between the round games, a feeling of strangeness is felt in the time from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game. there is a possibility. In this regard, according to this configuration, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the waiting period between the round games. Accordingly, when the round game is started after the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period have elapsed, the round game is started by the fact that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed. It is possible to prevent the player from being specified.

  The ending period and the opening period differ depending on the type of the extension flag in which “1” is set. According to this configuration, regardless of which of the first holding area Rb1 to the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb stores the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, the ending period and the extension of the round game are extended. The total time of the standby period and the opening period can be set to be the same as the standby period between round games.

  However, when “1” is set in the first extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is 0.8 seconds and the opening period is not limited to 0.7 seconds. The ending period and the opening period are arbitrary as long as the total time of the extended waiting period (0.5 sec) and the opening period becomes the same as the waiting period between round games.

  When “1” is set in the second extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is 0.5 seconds, and the opening period is not limited to 0.5 seconds. If the total time of the extended waiting period (1 sec) and the opening period becomes the same as the waiting period between round games, the ending period and the opening period are optional.

  When "1" is set in the third extension flag of the RAM 64, the ending period is set to 0.3 sec and the opening period is not limited to 0.2 sec. If the total time of the extended waiting period (1.5 sec) and the opening period becomes the same as the waiting period between round games, the ending period and the opening period are arbitrary.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 56), when the process of step S4020 is executed, a round game extension start command is set in step S4021. The round game extension start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 12).

When receiving the above-mentioned round game extension start command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the round game extension start command, and also executes the speaker unit 55. Execute output control. Next, the round game extension start command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as it is. This allows
The effect for the extended opening / closing execution mode is executed on the display screen G only during the period according to the extension flag in which “1” is set. Specifically, “Extended round game started!” Is displayed on the display screen G. This makes it possible for the player to assume that the extended round game has started.

  In a succeeding step S4022, the extension flag in which "1" is set is cleared to "0", and the game state transition processing ends.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when any one of the extension flags is set to “1”, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is the waiting time between the round games. Be the same. Here, if the total time is not the same as the waiting period between the round games, a feeling of strangeness is felt in the time from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game. there is a possibility. In this regard, according to this configuration, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the waiting period between the round games. Accordingly, when the round game is started after the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period have elapsed, the round game is started by the fact that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is consumed. It is possible to prevent the player from being specified.

  The ending period and the opening period differ depending on the type of the extension flag in which “1” is set. According to this configuration, regardless of which of the first holding area Rb1 to the third holding area Rb3 of the second holding area Rb stores the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, the ending period and the extension of the round game are extended. The total time of the standby period and the opening period can be set to be the same as the standby period between round games.

<Another example of the seventh embodiment>
(1) The effect of the ending period effect, the effect of the opening period, and the effect of the extended waiting period of the round game may be different depending on the type of the extension flag in which “1” is set. According to this configuration, it is possible to shorten the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period, and increase the degree of attention to the effects in each of the above periods.

  (2) As long as one of the extension flags is set to “1”, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the opening period and the ending period are shortened. Even when it is set, the opening period and the ending period may be shortened. Here, when "1" is set to the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64, it is notified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold in the open / close execution mode. A player who has specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold is likely to want the hold information to be promptly digested. Therefore, according to the present configuration, when “1” is set in the hold consecutive flag of the RAM 64, the opening period and the ending period are shortened, and therefore, it is desired that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning be quickly consumed. It is possible to provide a game that meets the needs of the player.

  (3) The ending period, the extended standby period of the round game, the opening period, and the total time are not limited to the same configuration as the standby period between round games. For example, the total time is the standby time. The period may be substantially the same as the period.

  (4) When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode, the present invention is applied to a configuration in which the variable display time is set to the shortest until the hold information is consumed. Can be. In this case, even in a situation where the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to a jackpot, an effect can be generated as if the round game is extended. It becomes. More specifically, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, “1” is set to the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64. The fourth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb. . When the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, “Preparing for an extended round game” is displayed on the display screen G after the open / close execution mode ends. When the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1”, the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the waiting period between the round games.

  (5) The effect displayed on the display screen G during the extended standby period of the round game may be the same as the effect displayed on the display screen G during each round game. The effect displayed on the display screen G between round games is, for example, an effect in which a character is waving with a smile. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to continue the round game without feeling uncomfortable, so that it is possible to reliably make the player think that the round game has been extended.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another embodiment may be individually applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the following different embodiments may be individually applied to the combined configurations, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, the configuration may be such that the reservation information stored in the reservation areas Ra, Rb can be simultaneously digested. In this case, it is determined whether or not to add the number of rounds to the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb other than the hold areas Ra and Rb in which the simultaneously processed hold information is stored. It is good also as a structure performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the number of rounds will be added and to increase the speed of digesting the reservation information.

  (2) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, the jackpot is won in the high probability mode and when the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is one or less. In this case, if the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is one or more, whether to add the number of rounds to the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra A configuration may be adopted in which a determination process is performed.

  In the first, second and fourth embodiments, when the jackpot is won in a situation where the mode is the low-probability mode and the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is 0, If the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is larger than one, one piece of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is left and stored in the second hold area Rb. A configuration may be adopted in which a determination process for determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed on other pending information that has been set.

  According to the above two configurations, it is more likely that the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds will be performed at the time of the jackpot win, so the frequency of adding the number of rounds will increase. This makes it possible to expect that the number of rounds will be added.

  (3) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when a 16R probability change jackpot result is obtained, the second hold is performed with a part of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb left. A determination process is performed as to whether or not the number of rounds is to be added to the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb. A configuration may be adopted in which a process of determining whether to add numbers is performed. Here, when the 16R probability-change jackpot result is obtained, the probability of becoming the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode is high. It is more pleasant for the player that the hold information remains in the hold area Rb. This is because, after the number of rounds is added, a game round triggered by the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb can be started. On the other hand, in the case of the 16R normal jackpot result, the possibility of becoming the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is low, and thus the second suspension after the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed. It is more pleasing to the player that the number of pieces of on-hold information to be subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is larger than the number of pieces of on-hold information remaining in the use area Rb. This is because the possibility of adding the number of rounds increases. According to this configuration, depending on the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode, the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is different, so that the player The above-described determination processing can be performed under convenient conditions.

  (4) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when the 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result are obtained, the holding areas Ra, which are the targets of the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds, are performed. When Rb is set to the second holding area Rb and the result of the 6R certain hit jackpot result and the 16R certain jackpot result are obtained, the holding areas Ra and Rb to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds are set to the first. It may be configured to be set in the holding area Ra.

  (5) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, in the success / failure judgment processing in the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, a round game is selected as a jackpot result selected when a jackpot is won. There are a plurality of types of jackpot results having different execution times, and the jackpot result selected when the jackpot has been won in the hit determination processing in the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb. In a configuration where multiple types of jackpot results differing in the number of round game executions are present, if a process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds is performed, a selection is made when the jackpot wins in the determination process. The number of round games executed will be the number of round games executed corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. It may be configured to be calculated. Here, in the success / failure determination processing in the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, as the jackpot result selected when the jackpot is won, the 4R normal jackpot result, the 8R normal jackpot result, and the 12R certain change A jackpot result is provided, and a specific description will be given by taking as an example a case where the first holding area Ra is a target of a determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds. In the success / failure determination processing in the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra, a 4R normal jackpot result is obtained, and the 4R in hold is set in the first hold area Ra for which the round number is to be determined. If the regular jackpot result, the reserved 8R regular jackpot result, and the reserved 12R certainty variable jackpot result are included, the number of rounds of the current round game is 28R (4R + 4R + 8R + 12R) (however, in the second embodiment, the number of rounds is 2). Is obtained in the lottery process for determining whether or not to be added.

  Also, in this configuration, if there is a latent jackpot result in which only a short opening occurs as a type of jackpot result, and if the pending latent jackpot result in the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is obtained, A configuration in which short open times are added may be adopted. Specifically, a configuration in which the short opening is performed after the round game corresponding to the long opening is executed may be adopted. According to this configuration, it is possible to surely give a benefit to any of the jackpot results. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. A configuration in which the opening is not added may be adopted.

  (6) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when the number of rounds is added, a fixed number of rounds is added regardless of the value of the jackpot number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. It is good also as composition. According to this configuration, it is necessary to complete the number of rounds in a situation where there is a large number of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the hold information targeted for the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds. It is possible to prevent the time from becoming too long.

  (7) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when performing the appropriateness determination processing of the hold information that is the target of the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds, refer to the exclusiveity determination table dedicated to the information. A configuration in which a pass / fail determination process is performed may be adopted. Specifically, the reference is made when performing the success / failure determination process of the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds, with the success / failure table for the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode. A special success / failure table is set. The special success / failure table may have a configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is set lower than the success / failure table for the low probability mode.

  In a configuration in which a winning / failing table for the low probability mode, a winning / failing table for the high probability mode, and the special winning / failing table are set, one winning / failing table is selected by lottery from the three types of winning / failing tables, With reference to the selected success / failure table, the success / failure determination processing of the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds may be performed. According to this configuration, in the success / failure determination processing of the hold information that is the target of the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds, it is possible to expect that a success / failure table having a high jackpot winning probability is selected. .

  In a configuration in which a plurality of types of winning / rejecting tables having different jackpot winning probabilities are set, the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the holding information to be subjected to the determination processing whether to add the number of rounds. It may be configured such that the larger the number of winnings, the higher the winning / winning probability is selected. According to this configuration, it is possible to secure the advantage of a situation where the number of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is large in the number of pieces of hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds. It becomes possible.

  (8) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when the second holding area Rb is a target of the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds, the second holding area Rb is stored in the second holding area Rb. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of pieces of pending information that is not subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds among the pieces of pending information is more than one. According to this configuration, in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game round triggered by the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is executed. Become.

  (9) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, in the hold information to be subjected to the process of determining whether or not to add the number of rounds, the success / failure determination process is performed in the order in which the hold information is acquired. In the case of the jackpot winning in the hit determination process, the hit determination of the hold information scheduled to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds obtained after the hold information having the jackpot win is determined. A configuration in which the processing is not performed may be adopted. Here, among the players, there is a possibility that there is a player who wants to add the number of rounds and wants to complete the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this regard, according to the configuration, the upper limit to which the number of rounds is added is set in advance. Thus, it is possible to add the number of rounds and to prevent the number of times the effect displayed on the display screen G is seen in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning from decreasing.

  (10) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds is from the start of the game round corresponding to the jackpot to the end thereof. It is not limited to the hold information acquired during the period, for example, the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds until the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is started The acquired hold information may be used. According to this configuration, since the hold information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds is the hold information obtained before the game round corresponding to the jackpot win is started, the game round is Even if it is started and the user tries to acquire the reservation information during the game round, the reservation information is not the reservation information to be subjected to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effects displayed on the display screen G in the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  In the configuration in which the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds is the hold information obtained before the game round corresponding to the jackpot is started, the hold information obtained at the time of winning the jackpot When the hold information that wins the jackpot is included, the reach effect of the hold information is specified, and the reach effect in which the reach effect is generated less frequently than the reach effect performed in the current game time. In the case of, the reach effect executed in the current game round may be changed to the reach effect corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the hold information. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a reach effect that is to be displayed and has a low occurrence frequency from being displayed.

  (11) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds After the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode has been consumed, the jackpot result included in the hold information subject to the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds May be configured to digest the number of rounds corresponding to. Here, the round number corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode is 6R, and the jackpot result included in the hold information subjected to the determination processing whether to add the round number is performed. The case where the number of rounds corresponding to is 16R will be described as an example. Specifically, 6R corresponding to the jackpot result which triggered the shift to the open / close execution mode is first consumed. After displaying on the display screen G an image that informs the player that the round game has ended, the image is included in the hold information that has been subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds. A 16R round game corresponding to the jackpot result is started. On the other hand, in a case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not included in the hold information subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds, the round game is ended after the 6Rs have been consumed. An image to be notified to the player is displayed on the display screen G, and the round game ends. Therefore, according to this configuration, after the round number corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the opening / closing execution mode has been consumed, the hold information that has been subjected to the determination processing as to whether to add the round number is included. It is possible to expect that a round game corresponding to the jackpot result included in is started.

  (12) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, a configuration may be employed in which a player can select hold information to be subjected to a determination process of whether or not to add the number of rounds. Specifically, when the game state shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, a selection image for allowing the player to select the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds on the display screen G is displayed. Is displayed. By operating a selection button provided on the upper bulging portion 56, the player selects the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds. According to this configuration, whether or not the number of rounds is added is determined based on the hold information selected by the player himself. Therefore, when the number of rounds is added, the sense of superiority over the addition of the number of rounds is large. Become. Further, according to this configuration, a step of selecting the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds is added to the game, so that a novel game can be provided to the player. Become.

  (13) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing as to whether or not to add the number of rounds includes the hold information for winning a jackpot, The user may be able to select whether or not to add the number of rounds. Specifically, in the first and fourth embodiments, when the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds includes the hold information for winning the jackpot, In the embodiment, when an addition is won in the lottery process of whether or not to add the number of rounds, a selection image for allowing the player to select whether or not to add the number of rounds is displayed on the display screen G. You. The player operates the selection button provided on the upper bulging portion 56 to select whether or not to add the number of rounds. In this case, when the pattern for adding the number of rounds is selected, a value corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information that is a jackpot is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, and the number of rounds is added. The hold information subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to perform the setting is cleared to “0”. On the other hand, when a pattern in which the number of rounds is not added is selected, "6" or "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. Also, in this case, the hold information that has been subjected to the process of determining whether to add the number of rounds is not cleared to “0”. When the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds includes the hold information for winning the jackpot, the player can select whether or not to add the number of rounds. With this configuration, the game content can be changed according to the mood of the player.

  (14) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, in a situation where a game round corresponding to a jackpot win is being executed, an effect that encourages that the number of rounds may be added on the display screen G. May be generated. Specifically, in a situation in which a game round corresponding to a jackpot win is being executed, a display such as "may be added the number of rounds when the jackpot wins" is generated on the display screen G. Good. This display indicates that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information targeted for the determination process of whether to add the number of rounds. A configuration that is more likely to occur as compared to a situation where it is not possible may be adopted. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that an effect will be generated that fuels the possibility that the number of rounds may be added on the display screen G every time the game starts.

  (15) In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, when the second start-retaining ball count NB becomes smaller than a predetermined number in the high-probability mode, the lower operation port is displayed on the display screen G. It may be configured to display that it is better to generate a prize to 24. When the firing operation is started from a state in which the number of second start-reserved balls NB is smaller than the predetermined number, before the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb is lost, The setting is made in consideration of a high probability that a winning in the operating port 24 occurs. Here, according to the present embodiment, in the case of the high-probability mode, it is supposed that the amount of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb frequently increases. In this case, the player may not perform the firing operation. Then, even if the launch operation is started in a situation where the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is exhausted and the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb becomes small, the second operation is started. There is a possibility that no winning in the lower working port 24 will occur before the number NB of starting balls reaches “0”. In this case, in the situation of the high probability mode, a game round triggered by the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is started. In this regard, according to the present configuration, in the case of the high probability mode, when the second number of holding balls NB becomes smaller than the predetermined number, a prize to the lower operating port 24 is generated on the display screen G. Is displayed. It is possible to cause the player who has stopped the firing operation to start the firing operation. Thus, in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the game round triggered by the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra from being started.

  (16) In the first to fourth embodiments, the winning in the upper working port 23 and the winning in the lower working port 24 may not be distinguished. In the configuration, in the first, second, and fourth embodiments, the hold information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether to add the number of rounds may be all the acquired hold information. It may be configured to be a part of the acquired suspension information. In the third embodiment, the hold information that can be simultaneously digested may be configured to be all of the acquired hold information, or may be configured to be a part of the acquired hold information. Good.

  (17) In the first to fourth embodiments, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the first start-reserved ball count NA and the second start-reserved ball count NB are each set to one byte. The number of reserved balls NA and the second number of reserved starting balls NB may be set to 1 byte in total.

  The upper limit of the hold information that can be stored in the first hold area Ra may be different from the upper limit of the hold information that can be stored in the second hold area Rb. In this configuration, the upper limit value of the hold information that can be stored in the first hold area Ra is smaller than the upper limit value of the hold information that can be stored in the second hold area Rb. It may be. Here, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, a winning in the lower working port 24 is likely to occur, so that the number of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb may be considerable. On the other hand, the ease of winning the upper working port 23 is not limited to the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to set an upper limit value corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information expected to be stored in each of the hold areas Ra and Rb.

  (18) In the first to fourth embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the hold information is not acquired even if a winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 occurs during the round game. Here, if a configuration is adopted in which the hold information is acquired when a winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 occurs during the round game, the number of the hold information may be too large. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to continue the firing operation. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if a winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 occurs during the round game, the hold information is not acquired, so that it is possible to prevent the number of the hold information from becoming too large. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to continuously perform the firing operation.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, when a winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 occurs during the round game, a configuration may be such that a benefit is given to the player. Specifically, a character which is displayed only when a winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 occurs during the round game and when a winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 occurs in the display screen G during the round game. It may be configured to be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that a winning in the operating ports 23 and 24 will occur in the round game even if the hold information is not acquired. Further, in this configuration, the benefit given to the player may be different depending on the number of game balls that have won the operation ports 23 and 24 during the round game. Specifically, in a round game, as the number of winning entries to the operating ports 23 and 24 increases, an effect that occurs less frequently in the next round game after the round game is more likely to be displayed on the display screen G. It may be. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that more prizes will be made to the operating ports 23 and 24 in the round game.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the benefits to be provided differ depending on the operating ports 23 and 24 in which a prize has occurred during the round game. Specifically, for example, when a winning in the upper operating port 23 occurs during the round game, the hold information can be acquired. When a winning in the lower operating port 24 occurs in the round game, the display screen is displayed. On the G, an image that is displayed only when a winning in the lower operation port 24 occurs during the round game may be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the hold information from being excessively acquired during the round game, and to increase the degree of attention to the operating ports 23 and 24 during the round game.

  (19) In the first to fourth embodiments, even when the number of rounds is added, the number of rounds is not limited to the configuration in which the number of prize balls corresponding to winning in the special winning opening 22a does not change. In the case where the number of rounds is added, the number of prize balls corresponding to winning in the special winning opening 22a is increased in consideration of the upper limit of the total number of game balls paid out to the player in one open / close execution mode when the number of rounds is added. It may be. In this case, the number of times the special winning opening 22a is opened after it is closed can be reduced. Therefore, according to this configuration, even if the number of rounds is added, the total number of game balls to be paid out to the player in one opening / closing execution mode is maintained without changing the time required for completing the round game. It is possible to increase the upper limit.

  (20) In the first to fourth embodiments, when the upper limit of the number of rounds after addition reaches a predetermined value, the number of rounds exceeding the predetermined value is stocked, and the next round of the jackpot is won. The number of rounds corresponding to the stock may be added to the number of rounds. Here, the above configuration will be specifically described on the assumption that the predetermined value is set to 32R. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the predetermined value is set to 32R. Specifically, the winning information is won for the 16R probability change jackpot result, and the number of pieces of the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the holding information to be subjected to the determination processing of whether or not to add the number of rounds. In this case, the upper limit number of rounds after addition is 32R. If the number of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the hold information to be determined as to whether or not to add the number of rounds is two, the remaining 16R is stocked and the number of rounds If the number of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the hold information to be determined as to whether or not to add is 3, the remaining 32R is stocked, and the number of rounds is added. When the number of pieces of suspension information corresponding to the jackpot winning included in the suspension information to be determined as to whether or not to perform is four, it means that the remaining 48R has been stocked. When the number of rounds is stocked, the number of rounds that have been stocked is added to the number of rounds at the time of winning the next jackpot. In this case, when the number of rounds after the addition exceeds 32R, the state of storing the number of rounds is maintained or the number of rounds is newly stored.

  Here, during the round game, the player cannot leave the seat because the firing operation must be performed. Also, as the number of rounds increases, the time during which a person cannot leave the seat increases. Therefore, as the number of rounds increases, the time for restraining the player increases. In this regard, according to this configuration, even if the upper limit of the number of rounds after the addition exceeds a predetermined value, the upper limit of the number of rounds after the addition becomes the predetermined value. As a result, the pleasure of adding the number of rounds is given to the player, and it is possible to prevent the time for restraining the player from being lengthened. Further, according to this configuration, the number of rounds exceeding the predetermined value is stocked, and the number of rounds stocked is added to the number of rounds at the time of the next jackpot winning. Therefore, when the number of rounds is added, it is possible to make the player want to play a game until the next big hit win. This allows the player to play the game as long as possible.

  (21) In the first to fourth embodiments, the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra and the number of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb are displayed on the display screen G. Other than the above, the display may be performed. Specifically, for example, a first display unit that displays the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is provided in an upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32, and is provided on the front side of the center frame 32. A configuration may be such that a second display unit that displays the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is provided in the upper right part. According to this configuration, the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first hold area Ra and the number of hold information stored in the second hold area Rb are specified without looking on the display screen G. It becomes possible.

  (22) In the first to fourth embodiments, the same number of pieces of hold information stored in the corresponding hold areas Ra and Rb in the first hold number display area Ga and the second hold number display area Gb. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the numbers are displayed, and is arbitrary as long as the display corresponding to the number of the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is performed. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be employed in which a hold display corresponding to the number of hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is performed.

  (23) In the fifth and seventh embodiments, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the variable display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec, and the upper limit of the number of game times is limited to three. However, for example, the upper limit number of game times in which the variable display time is set to the shortest 0.5 seconds after the end of the opening / closing execution mode may be set to 1, 2, or 3 times.

  Further, the upper limit number of game times in which the fluctuating display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is based on the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second holding area Rb at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Alternatively, the configuration may be reduced by one.

  (24) In the fifth and seventh embodiments, the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1" even when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the first hold area Ra. May be adopted. In the fifth embodiment, specifically, the second starting hold ball count NB is “2”, the second hold area Rb does not include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, and the first hold area. When the first hold area Ra1 of Ra includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, “1” is set to the extension flag of the RAM 64. In addition, the second starting hold ball count NB is “1”, the second hold area Rb does not include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, and the first hold area Ra1 of the first hold area Ra or When the second hold area Ra2 includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, “1” is set to the extension flag of the RAM 64. In addition, the second start-holding ball count NB is “0”, the second holding area Rb does not include the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, and the first holding area Ra1 of the first holding area Ra, When the second hold area Rb2 or the third hold area Rb3 includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64. When “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 64 triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first holding area Ra, the jackpot is won at the timing when the extension flag is set to “1”. Is notified to the player that the hold information corresponding to the... Is stored and that no prize is generated in the lower operating port 24. Specifically, on the display screen G, “Round game extension is confirmed Note: Do not generate a prize in the lower working port” is displayed. Here, if the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed, the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb. The held hold information is preferentially digested. In this case, the time required until the next round game is started may be long. In this regard, according to this configuration, after the open / close execution mode ends, the first display area Ra corresponds to the jackpot winning in consideration of the maximum number of game times in which the variable display time is set to the shortest 0.5 sec. When the suspension information is specified, whether or not the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” is different. As a result, the extension flag of the RAM 64 can be set to "1" only in a situation where the variable display time is the shortest 0.5 sec. Therefore, even in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the first hold area Ra, it is possible to set an effect as if the round game was extended.

  Further, according to this configuration, when the extension flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra, a winning in the lower operating port 24 is achieved. Is notified to the player so as not to generate the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent new hold information from being stored in the second hold area Rb before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning stored in the first hold area Ra is consumed. It becomes.

  In the seventh embodiment, specifically, the second starting hold ball count NB is “0”, the second hold area Rb does not store the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, and the first hold area. When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the first hold area Ra1 of Ra, “1” is set to the fourth extension flag of the RAM 64. The fourth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the number of game executions performed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 until the next round game is started is one. In addition, the second starting reserved ball count NB is “0”, the second reserved area Rb does not store the reserved information corresponding to the jackpot win, and the second reserved area Ra2 of the first reserved area Ra. If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, “1” is set to the fifth extension flag of the RAM 64. The fifth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the number of times of the game executed until the next round game is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is two. In addition, the second start-holding ball number NB is “0”, the second holding area Rb does not store the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, and the third holding area Ra3 of the first holding area Ra. If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, “1” is set to the sixth extension flag of the RAM 64. The sixth extension flag is a flag for specifying that the number of game times executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 before the next round game is started is three.

  In addition, the second starting reserved ball count NB is “1”, the second reserved area Rb does not store the reserved information corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the first reserved area Ra1 of the first reserved area Ra. If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, “1” is set to the fifth extension flag of the RAM 64. Also, the second start-holding ball number NB is “1”, the second holding area Rb does not store the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, and the second holding area Ra2 of the first holding area Ra If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, “1” is set to the sixth extension flag of the RAM 64. In addition, the second start-holding ball count NB is “2”, the second holding area Rb does not store the holding information corresponding to the jackpot, and the first holding area Ra1 in the first holding area Ra. If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, “1” is set to the sixth extension flag of the RAM 64.

  At the timing when any one of the extension flags is set to "1", it is notified to the player that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored and that no winning is made to the lower operating port 24. You. Specifically, on the display screen G, “Round game extension is confirmed Note: Do not generate a prize in the lower working port” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning from being generated in the lower operation port 24.

  When “1” is set in any of the extension flags, the ending period and the opening period are shortened. Specifically, the ending period and the opening period are shortened so that the total time of the ending period, the extended waiting period of the round game, and the opening period is the same as the waiting period between round games.

  (25) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when an effect as if the round game is extended is generated, the opening period may not be generated at the start of the next opening / closing execution mode. Further, when an effect as if the round game is extended is generated, the ending period may not be generated. In addition, when an effect as if the round game is extended is generated, the opening period may not be generated in the ending period and the start of the next opening / closing execution mode. According to the above three configurations, when an effect as if the round game is extended on the display screen G occurs, the time required until the next round game is started is shortened. It is possible to prevent the round game from being made to feel as if it has been extended.

  (26) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when an effect as if the round game is extended is generated, the opening effect when the next round game is started is displayed on the display screen G as “extended”. Minute round game start! "Is not limited to the configuration in which a still image is displayed. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a character is displayed on the display screen G, and the character performs an operation of congratulating that the round game has been extended (for example, an operation in which the character claps his hand with a smile).

  (27) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the timing at which the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process is performed in the open / close execution mode may be changed according to the situation. Specifically, first, at the timing when the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the in-hold approval / disapproval determination processing for the acquired hold information is executed. If the jackpot is not won in the holding success / failure determination processing, the holding success / failure determination processing may be performed every time the hold information to be determined in the holding success / failure determination processing is acquired. When a jackpot win is achieved in the on-hold winning / non-permission determination processing, a notification effect corresponding to the jackpot win may be generated at the timing of the jackpot win. Here, if the notification effect does not occur on the display screen G at the timing when the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, it is specified to the player that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is not stored in the hold. Will be done. In this case, the player's motivation may be reduced. If the player's motivation decreases, the open / close execution mode cannot be played happily. In this regard, according to the present configuration, if the notification effect does not occur at the timing when the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, each time after that, when acquiring the hold information to be determined in the hold validity determination process, The in-hold success / failure determination processing is performed, and the above-described notification effect is generated at the timing when the jackpot is won. When the notification effect occurs, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold, so that the player's motivation is improved. Therefore, by improving the player's motivation at the earliest possible stage, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the open / close execution mode for a long time.

  (28) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether or not to perform the on-hold success / failure determination processing during the open / close execution mode. More specifically, a lottery process is performed at the timing of the jackpot result to determine whether or not to perform the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination process. Only when it is determined in the lottery that the on-hold judging process is to be performed, the on-hold judging process is performed in the open / close execution mode. Here, if it is configured that the on-hold success / failure determination processing is always performed during the opening / closing execution mode, if the notification effect for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold does not occur, the hold is performed. It is specified by the player that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not stored in the game. In this regard, according to the present configuration, in some cases, the in-hold success / failure determination process is not performed during the open / close execution mode, so that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold even if the notification effect does not occur. It is possible to expect that it is.

  In this configuration, in the lottery process of whether or not the above-mentioned on-hold judging process is performed in the high probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the judgment result of executing the on-hold judging process is performed. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy to become. Here, it is highly likely that the player is expecting the notification effect to occur. Therefore, according to the configuration, it is possible to secure the benefit of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode.

  (29) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the number of times of execution of the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process in one open / close execution mode may be more than two. Further, in this configuration, a notification effect may be generated that notifies that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold at the timing of the jackpot win. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of times that the user can be thrilled depending on whether or not the notification effect occurs.

  The configuration may be such that the number of times that the in-hold success / failure determination process is performed in the open / close execution mode is one. In this configuration, it may be configured such that the pending success / failure determination processing is performed at the end of the round game. Here, it is possible to acquire the hold information even during the round game. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to perform the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process in a situation where the number of pieces of hold information to be determined by the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process is large. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the notification effect will occur.

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing is performed at the start of the first change after the end of the open / close execution mode. In this case, the hold validity determination process may be performed both during the opening and closing execution mode and at the time of the first change start after the opening and closing execution mode, or at the time of the first change start after the opening and closing execution mode ends. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only the in-suspension determination processing is performed. In the configuration in which the in-hold approval / disapproval determination processing is performed both during the open / close execution mode and at the time of the first change start after the end of the open / close execution mode, the on-hold approval / disapproval determination at the first start of the change after the end of the open / close execution mode If it is determined in the processing that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, an effect corresponding to that may be displayed on the display screen G during the extended standby period of the round game. . Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which a smiling character as if congratulating that the round game is extended is displayed on the display screen G. According to the school configuration, it is possible to increase pleasure for extending the round game.

  In a configuration in which the in-hold success / failure determination process is performed only at the start of the first fluctuation after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the round game is displayed on the display screen G until the hold information targeted for the determination in the on-hold determination process is consumed. An image may be displayed to inform the user that the file may be extended. Specifically, a configuration may be such that an image “Round game may be extended !?” is displayed on the display screen G. In this configuration, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the above-mentioned hold success / failure determination processing, “extended round game start!” Is displayed on the display screen G and the next A configuration in which a round game is started may be adopted. In this case, the player feels as if the round game has been extended. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the round game has been extended even if the on-hold success / failure determination process is not performed in the open / close execution mode.

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pending success / failure determination processing is performed only from the end of the opening period to the start of the ending period. Further, the configuration may be such that the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process is performed only during the ending period. It is possible to acquire the hold information even after the round game ends. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process in a situation where the number of hold information to be determined in the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process is large.

  (30) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the timing at which the notification effect for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold is made the jackpot winning in the holding hit / fail determination processing. The timing is not limited to the above timing. For example, when a jackpot is won in the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination processing, the timing for generating the notification effect may be determined by lottery. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform the game while expecting that the notification effect is always performed during the round game.

  If it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information acquired during the opening / closing execution mode, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to generate a notification effect notifying that fact. It is good also as a structure performed. Here, if the notification effect does not occur in the open / close execution mode, it is specified to the player that the acquired hold information does not include the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this regard, according to this configuration, even if it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold information acquired during the opening / closing execution mode, the notification effect may not occur. There is. Thereby, even if the notification effect does not occur in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to expect that the acquired hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  (31) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the variable display time may be different between the 6R and 16R normal jackpot results and the 6R and 16R sure-change jackpot results after the end of the open / close execution mode. In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the type determination processing is not performed after the pending success / failure determination processing is performed. Therefore, the type of the jackpot result stored in the hold cannot be specified until the round game corresponding to the hold information ends. In this regard, according to this configuration, the variable display time after the end of the opening / closing execution mode differs depending on the type of the jackpot result. That is, by specifying the variable display time after the end of the open / close execution mode, it is possible to specify the type of the jackpot result stored in the hold. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the variable display time after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  (32) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the hold information corresponding to a miss result stored in an area lower than the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is deleted. According to this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time from when the opening / closing execution mode ends to when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed, so that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is consumed. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to notice that the next round game has started.

  (33) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the on-hold success / failure determination process may be performed on the hold information acquired after the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning. In this configuration, when a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning are specified in the holding success / failure determination processing, a notification corresponding to the presence of a plurality of pieces of hold information to be a jackpot win is performed. Is also good. Specifically, for example, when a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning are specified in the hold winning / non-permission determination processing, “extended round game is stocked” is displayed on the display screen G. Accordingly, it is possible to expect that the above-described notification effect corresponding to the presence of a plurality of pieces of suspension information that will be a jackpot win will be performed.

  (34) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, in the configuration in which the on-hold success / failure determination processing is performed even on the hold information acquired after the on-hold information corresponding to the jackpot success win, the on-hold success / failure determination processing is performed in the on-hold success / failure determination processing. When it is determined that the type is determined, the type determination process may be performed. Further, in this configuration, when a plurality of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is specified in the hold success / failure determination processing, the round game is extended by the total number of rounds corresponding to the result of the various determination processing. The notification may be made on the display screen G. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the determination target of the on-hold determination processing is the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, the second hold area Rb The hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result. The hold information stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to the departure result, and the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb is 16R normal. In the case of the jackpot result, a message that the round game is extended by 28R, which is the sum of 6R, 6R, and 16R, is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, an image “+ 28R” is displayed on the display screen G. The image “+ 28R” is displayed on the display screen G until the 28R corresponding to the extension is consumed. According to this configuration, it is possible not only to pay attention to whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold, but also to pay attention to the total of the extended round games.

  The on-hold success / failure determination processing is also performed on the hold information acquired after the on-hold information corresponding to the jackpot win, and when the on-hold success / failure determination processing specifies that the jackpot has been won, the type determination processing is performed. In the configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is continuously stored, the display screen G indicates that the round game is extended by the total number of rounds at the time when the hold information corresponding to the miss result is specified. It is good also as a structure displayed above. Specifically, for example, in a situation where the determination target of the on-hold determination processing is the hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 to the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb, the second hold area Rb The hold information stored in the first hold area Rb1 corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb2 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result. The hold information stored in the third hold area Rb3 of the second hold area Rb corresponds to the departure result, and the hold information stored in the fourth hold area Rb4 of the second hold area Rb is 16R normal. In the case of the jackpot result, the fact that the round game is extended by 12R, which is the sum of 6R and 6R, is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, an image “+ 12R” is displayed on the display screen G. The image “+ 12R” is displayed on the display screen G until the 12R corresponding to the extension is consumed.

  The on-hold success / failure determination processing is also performed on the hold information acquired after the on-hold information corresponding to the jackpot win, and when the on-hold success / failure determination processing specifies that the jackpot has been won, the type determination processing is performed. In the configuration, in the situation where it is continuously specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, it is specified that the result is out of order in the hold success / failure determination processing for the next hold information. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing for the on-hold information thereafter is not performed. In this case, it may be configured to display on the display screen G that the round game is extended by the total number of rounds at the time when the hold information corresponding to the miss result is specified.

  (35) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is specified in the holding success / failure determination processing performed in the specific number of rounds, at the end of the round game. The configuration is such that the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing for the on-hold information is performed, and if it is specified that the jackpot has not been won in the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing, the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing is performed on the on-hold information again. Alternatively, a notification may be made in accordance with the result of the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process. According to this configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing.

  (36) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the hold information once determined in the on-hold / non-hold determination processing is set as a determination target in the on-hold / non-hold determination processing performed again in one open / close execution mode. The configuration may not be performed. In this case, the determination result of the first-time hold determination processing is stored in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 identifies the hold information to be determined in the second hold-in-place determination process by specifying the determination result of the first hold-in-place determination process stored in the RAM 64. Here, when the same hold information is a determination target, there is no difference in the determination result between the first-time hold-in-time determination process and the second hold-in-time determination process. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process that has the same determination result from being executed again.

  (37) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the pending permission / inhibition determination processing is performed, the result of the pending permission / inhibition determination processing is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90, and The MPU 92 may be configured to check the result of the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process for the same hold information a plurality of times. Specifically, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 transmits a determination result command to the sound emission control device 90 when performing the on-hold approval / disapproval determination process. The determination result command includes information on the determination result of the pending success / failure determination process. That is, the judgment result command includes information on the jackpot result or the miss result. The determination result of the on-hold / reject determination process is stored in the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 62 of the audio light emission control device 90 determines whether or not the result of the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination processing stored in the RAM 94 is a jackpot winning. If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot winning flag in the RAM 94 is set to “1”. Thereafter, the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 determines again whether or not the determination result of the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination process stored in the RAM 94 is a jackpot winning. In a situation where the determination result of the on-hold success / failure determination processing indicates that the big hit has been won, if the big hit winning flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1”, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 sets the big hit on hold. A notification command for notifying the player that the hold information corresponding to the winning is included is transmitted to the display control device 100. As a result, an image is displayed on the display screen G indicating that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold. According to this configuration, the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 accurately determines whether or not a situation is displayed in which an image notifying that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold is displayed. It becomes possible.

  The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 confirms the determination result of the pending permission determination process during the round game based on the determination result of the pending response determination process performed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 during the round game. Then, the same determination result may be confirmed again during the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 transmits a determination result command to the audio light emission control device 90 when performing the pending success / failure determination process during the round game. The determination result command includes information on the determination result of the pending success / failure determination process. That is, the judgment result command includes information on the jackpot result or the miss result. The determination result of the on-hold / reject determination process is stored in the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 62 of the audio light emission control device 90 determines whether or not the result of the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination processing stored in the RAM 94 is a jackpot winning. If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot winning flag in the RAM 94 is set to “1”. Thereafter, during the ending period, the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 again determines whether or not the determination result of the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination process stored in the RAM 94 indicates a jackpot winning. In a situation where the determination result of the on-hold success / failure determination processing indicates that the big hit has been won, if the big hit winning flag of the RAM 94 is set to “1”, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 sets the big hit on hold. A notification command for notifying the player that the hold information corresponding to the winning is included is transmitted to the display control device 100. As a result, an image is displayed on the display screen G indicating that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold. According to this configuration, since the determination result of the holding success / failure determination processing of the same holding information is confirmed again during the ending period, the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the holding during the ending period. Can be accurately displayed.

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing is performed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 instead of the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. More specifically, when it is time to execute the on-hold approval / disapproval determination processing, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 transmits an approval / disapproval determination command to the sound emission control device 90. The hit determination command includes numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold information to be determined in the hold determination processing. Here, in the present configuration, it is assumed that the ROM 93 of the sound emission control device 90 is set with the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot winning. In the MPU 62 of the audio light emission control device 90, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot winning set in the ROM 93 is the same as the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit / fail judgment command. It is determined a plurality of times whether or not it is. According to the configuration, the processing load on the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can be reduced. If the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot winning set in the ROM 93 is the same as the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit / failure determination command, the voice light emission control device 90 is suspended. The display control device 100 transmits a notification command for notifying the player that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included therein. As a result, an image is displayed on the display screen G indicating that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is included in the hold. On the other hand, when the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the jackpot winning set in the ROM 93 is not the same as the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit / fail judgment command, the notification command is displayed. Not transmitted to control device 100.

  (38) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the specific number of rounds has been reached and when the upper limit number of round games has been completed, it is the timing at which the pending success / failure determination processing is performed on the display screen G. It is good also as a structure which displays the image which notifies a player of this. Specifically, for example, a configuration in which “determining” is displayed on the display screen G may be adopted. According to this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to clearly specify the timing at which the on-hold success / failure determination process is performed. Thereby, even if the timing of performing the above-mentioned holding success / failure determination processing is not grasped, it is determined whether or not a notification effect for notifying that the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the holding is generated. It becomes possible to excite.

  (39) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in the hold in the hold success / failure determination process, the display screen G is displayed after the open / close execution mode ends. , The first round image of the round game corresponding to the extension may be displayed. In this case, the large winning opening 22a does not change from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the image is displayed on the display screen G, but is extended to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. After the corresponding round number is set, the special winning opening 22a is changed from the closed state to the open state. According to this configuration, when the round game is started, it is more likely that the round game has been extended than when the round game is started is displayed on the display screen G after the open / close execution mode ends. It is possible to make them think.

  (40) Even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 24a of the lower operation port 24 is easily opened and the mode in which the electric accessory 24a of the lower operation port 24 is not opened are set. The fifth to seventh inventions can be applied.

  (41) The fifth to seventh inventions can also be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the upper limit number of the hold information that can be stored in each of the holding areas Ra and Rb is more than four. In the pachinko machine 10 in which the upper limit number of the hold information that can be stored in each of the hold areas Ra and Rb is more than four, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in an area higher than the predetermined hold area. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which the hold information corresponding to the departure result stored in an area lower than the hold area in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored. The predetermined holding area is set in consideration that the extended waiting period of the round game does not become too long. Here, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in an area higher than the predetermined hold area, the extended waiting period of the round game becomes too long. In this case, it is impossible to make the player think that the round game has been extended. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored in an area higher than the predetermined hold area, the hold information lower than the hold area in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win is stored is stored. Hold information corresponding to the departure result stored in the side area is digested. According to this configuration, by preventing the extended waiting period of the round game from becoming too long, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to think that the round game has been extended. Becomes possible.

  (42) When a jackpot is won, the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode always becomes a high probability mode. The number of times that the state of the support mode is continued is set from 0, 20, 50, and 100 times, and if a jackpot is won with the prize in the lower operation port 24 as a trigger, after the opening and closing execution mode ends The first to seventh inventions can also be applied to a configuration in which the number of times that the state of the high frequency support mode continues is set to 100 times.

  The winning probability of the type of the jackpot is different between the winning in the upper operating port 23 and the winning in the lower operating port 24, and the winning / rejecting lottery mode is changed to the high-probability mode by making the V winning during the round game. The first to seventh inventions can also be applied to a configuration in which the transition is made.

  (43) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the audio light emission control device 90 based on a command output from the main control device 60, display control is performed based on a command output from the main control device 60. The device 100 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 90. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be adopted. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of the two control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. In addition, the configuration of commands output from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 90 and the configuration of commands output from the audio emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are also arbitrary.

  (44) The device in which the effect for the game is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and the effect for the game is executed when the movable member provided operates. It may be configured such that an effect for game play is executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or an effect for game play is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of the special device, or a game ball in a specific region of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, etc. provided with other accessories.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated without being discharged to island facilities. Further, it is impossible for the player to refill the game balls into the pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the firing operation is performed when the number of usable game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which a game ball is fired when performed and the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, when a prize ball is generated due to a winning in the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, the special winning opening 22a, or the like, the number of usable game balls increases on the data.

<About the inventions extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Acquisition means (operating port prize processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring predetermined information (hold information) based on occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24) Function) and
Predetermined information storage means (first reservation area Ra and second reservation area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A determination is made as to whether or not the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the provision correspondence information corresponding to the provision of the profit (information that is a jackpot result). When the predetermined information is stored, an assignment determining unit (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that sequentially performs the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of the predetermined information;
Privilege granting means (main control device 60) for granting a privilege to a player based on a result of the granting determination being that the predetermined information to be determined corresponds to the granting correspondence information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62);
Before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means becomes a target of the assignment determination, specifying means for specifying whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information (first and In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1003 and S1005 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. In the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1703 and S1705 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S2805 and S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is performed. In the seventh embodiment, the processing of steps S2805 and S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is executed. Function),
A special execution unit (1st execution unit) that executes a special process for causing an event advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific information corresponds to the special information by the specifying unit. In the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S1305 to S1314 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1613 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2304 to S2308 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Excluding means for excluding the specific predetermined information from the target of the assignment determination (the function of executing the process of step S911 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first and fourth embodiments, the main control in the second embodiment) A function of executing the process of step S1614 in the MPU 62 of the device 60, and a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the third embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A1, it is determined whether or not the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information before the specific predetermined information becomes a target of the assignment determination. Special processing is performed to generate an event that is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation even in a situation in which the grant determination is not performed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, specific predetermined information that has been a specific execution target of whether or not it corresponds to the special information can be excluded from the target of the assignment determination. This makes it possible to further limit the occurrence of an event for which the specific predetermined information that has triggered the execution of the special processing is a target of the determination of the grant, and the profit given to the player does not become excessive. It is possible to do so.

  Feature A2. In the situation where the result of the assignment determination is the assignment corresponding result, the specifying unit is configured to determine whether the specific predetermined information different from the predetermined information that triggered the assignment corresponding result corresponds to the special information. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein whether or not the game machine is specified is specified.

  According to the feature A2, special processing can be performed as a further addition in a situation where the result of the assignment determination is the assignment corresponding result. As a result, the situation in which the special processing is performed can be made clear to the player, and the degree of advantage that the result of the assignment determination becomes the assignment corresponding result can be increased.

Feature A3. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
A predetermined game state in which the variable ball-in means is in the open state based on the result of the provision determination being that the predetermined information to be determined corresponds to the provision result corresponding to the provision correspondence information ( State transition means for transitioning a game state to a round game) (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the special execution means increases the number of executions of the predetermined game state based on the fact that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information.

  According to the feature A3, in a situation where the result of the assignment determination is the assignment corresponding result, the number of executions of the predetermined game state is increased based on the fact that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information. Here, there is a high possibility that the player wants to increase the number of executions of the predetermined game state. Therefore, when the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information, it is possible to cause an event desired by the player. This makes it possible to enhance the sense of excitement when the specific information corresponds to the special information.

  Feature A4. The specifying means specifies that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the special information when the specific predetermined information is information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information in at least a predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

  According to the feature A4, in order for the special processing to be executed with the specific predetermined information as an opportunity, the specific predetermined information needs to be information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information at least in a predetermined situation. This makes it possible to bring the conditions necessary for the execution of the special processing closer to the conditions necessary for obtaining the result of the provision of correspondence, and the player's expectation that the predetermined information corresponds to the provision of correspondence information. It is possible to enhance the feeling.

Feature A5. There are a plurality of modes (low-probability mode and high-probability mode) such that the probability of the provision of the provision result is relatively high or low as the mode of the provision determination.
The specifying unit refers to the mode of the assignment determination that was to be set when the specific predetermined information is actually the target of the assignment determination, and the specific predetermined information is included in the assignment corresponding information. Means for specifying whether or not the function is supported (in the first and second embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1103 to S1109 and steps S1203 to S1209 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the third embodiment Wherein the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has a function of executing the processing of steps S2103 to S2105).

  According to the feature A5, it is possible to specify whether or not specific predetermined information corresponds to the addition correspondence information under the same conditions as when the assignment determination is actually performed. Thereby, when the specific predetermined information specifies whether or not it corresponds to the provision correspondence information, and when the provision determination is actually performed in the specific predetermined information, the provision of the provision correspondence is performed. It is possible to prevent the probability of the result from being different.

Feature A6. There are a plurality of modes (low-probability mode and high-probability mode) such that the probability of the provision of the provision result is relatively high or low as the mode of the provision determination.
Means for specifying whether or not the specific information corresponds to the provision information by referring to the provision determination mode in which the probability of the provision result is relatively low. The gaming machine according to feature A4, further comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2403 and S2503 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60).

  According to the feature A6, it is specified whether or not specific predetermined information corresponds to the assignment corresponding information with reference to the assignment determination mode in which the probability of the assignment corresponding result is relatively low. Therefore, even if a considerable number of specific predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the number of specific predetermined information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information does not become too large. This makes it possible to prevent an event that is advantageous for the player from occurring too much.

Feature A7. When the specific information corresponds to the special information, the special execution means determines whether or not to execute the special processing by lottery (executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). Function for executing the processing of steps S1706 to S1713),
The features A1 to A6, wherein the larger the number of the specific predetermined information corresponding to the special information, the higher or the higher the probability that the special processing is performed in the lottery. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature A7, as the number of the specific information corresponding to the special information is larger, the probability that the special process is performed in the lottery becomes higher or higher. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a benefit to a situation where the number of specific pieces of specific information corresponding to special information is large.

Feature A8. When the specific information corresponds to the special information, the special execution means determines whether or not to execute the special processing by lottery (executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). Function for executing the processing of steps S1706 to S1713),
The exclusion means, when the result of the special process is executed in the lottery, the specific predetermined information is excluded from the target of the assignment determination, while the result of the special process is not executed in the lottery The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein when the specific information is provided, the specific predetermined information is not excluded from a target of the assignment determination.

  According to the feature A8, when the special processing is performed in the lottery, the specific predetermined information is excluded from the target of the addition determination, and when the special processing is not performed in the lottery, the specific information is excluded. The predetermined information is not excluded from the target of the assignment determination. According to this configuration, the profit given to the player is prevented from being excessive, and the specific correspondence information is expected to be the result of the provision when the predetermined information is subjected to the provision determination. It becomes possible.

Feature A9. A launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
In the game area, at least a first start ball entry section (upper operation port 23) and a second start ball entry section (lower operation port 24) as a start ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. ) Is provided,
The predetermined information storage means,
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start entry section;
A second predetermined information storage unit (a second holding area Rb) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the second start entry unit.
The assignment determining unit is configured to perform the assignment determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit,
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining means at a timing earlier than the stored predetermined information is stored in the first predetermined information storage. Priority means (1st, 2nd, and 2nd) for making the assignment determination by the assignment determination means for the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means. The fourth embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the third embodiment has a function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60).
The identification means starts the identification when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and does not start when the predetermined end condition is satisfied even if the predetermined information is present, even if the predetermined information is present. The predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means and stored in the second predetermined information storage means from when the predetermined start condition is satisfied to when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein only one of the predetermined information is set as the specific execution target.

  According to the feature A9, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific information stored in the first predetermined storage means and the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined storage means are stored in the predetermined execution times when the specification is performed by the specifying means. Only one of the specified pieces of specified information is a specific execution target by the specifying means. As a result, the number of specific pieces of specific information targeted for specifying whether or not the special information is supported does not become too large, and an event that is advantageous to the player is prevented from occurring too much. Becomes possible. In addition, since the specific execution target by the specific means is switched in units of the type of the predetermined storage means at a predetermined execution time, the processing configuration for determining the type of the predetermined information to be the specific execution target is simplified. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature A10. A launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
In the game area, at least a first start ball entry section (upper operation port 23) and a second start ball entry section (lower operation port 24) as a start ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. ) Is provided,
The predetermined information storage means,
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start entry section;
A second predetermined information storage unit (a second holding area Rb) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the second start entry unit.
The assignment determining unit is configured to perform the assignment determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit,
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining means at a timing earlier than the stored predetermined information is stored in the first predetermined information storage. Priority means (1st, 2nd, 2nd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, right) elements for making the assignment determination by the assignment determination means for the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means. The fourth to seventh embodiments have a function of executing the process of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the third embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60).
The privilege to be provided when the predetermined information to be subjected to the provision determination stored in the second predetermined information storage means becomes the provision correspondence result is stored in the first predetermined information storage means. The predetermined information to be subjected to the grant determination is preferential to the privilege granted when the grant corresponding result is obtained,
The exclusion unit is configured to store at least one piece of the predetermined information in the second predetermined information storage unit when the specification by the specification unit is performed in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9, wherein the game machine is left without being excluded from the target of the determination.

  According to the feature A10, even if the identification or special processing is executed by the identification unit in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit, one or more predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit thereafter. The state where the information is stored is maintained. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a situation in which the determination is performed on the second predetermined information that is the target of priority digestion and is likely to be provided with an advantageous privilege when the result of the provision of the provision is satisfied.

  Feature A11. The features A1 to A10, wherein, when the specific information corresponds to the special information, the special execution unit changes execution content of the special processing according to the content of the specific predetermined information. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature A11, the execution content of the special processing can be made different according to the content of the specific predetermined information. Accordingly, it is possible to diversify the execution contents of the special processing based on the contents of the specific predetermined information.

  Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B4, the features C1 to C17, and the features D1 to D3 may be applied to the features A1 to A11. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Acquisition means (operating port prize processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring predetermined information (hold information) based on occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24) Function) and
Predetermined information storage means (first reservation area Ra and second reservation area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A determination is made as to whether or not the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the provision correspondence information corresponding to the provision of the profit (information that is a jackpot result). When the predetermined information is stored, an assignment determining unit (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that sequentially performs the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of the predetermined information;
Privilege granting means (main control device 60) for granting a privilege to a player based on a result of the granting determination being that the predetermined information to be determined corresponds to the granting correspondence information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62);
Game turn control means for controlling the game turn execution means so that the game turn operation is executed in response to the execution of the grant determination (a function of executing a game turn control process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). When,
The timing from the execution timing of the grant determination corresponding to the game execution operation of the predetermined execution time to the timing at which the assignment determination corresponding to the game execution operation of the next execution time can be executed with respect to the predetermined execution time By this means, a specifying means for performing at least one of the plurality of the predetermined information, the specific determination of the addition determination and the determination of whether or not the plurality of pieces of predetermined information correspond to the addition corresponding information in at least a predetermined situation ( A function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Special execution means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the step in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first and fourth embodiments) for executing a special process for generating an advantageous event for the player based on the result of the specification determination by the specifying means. S1305: a function of executing the process of step S1314, in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1613 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Function for executing the processing of S2308);
Excluding means for excluding at least a part of the predetermined information from which the specific determination has been performed from the determination target (in the first and fourth embodiments, the processing of step S911 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is executed. Function in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1614 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60).
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B1, a specific determination may be performed on a plurality of pieces of predetermined information at a time, and a special process for generating an advantageous event for the player is performed based on a result of the specific determination. . This makes it possible to generate a situation different from the situation in which the provision determination is made for one piece of predetermined information with respect to the determination as to whether or not to provide a profit to the player, and the situation in which the player pays attention It is possible to diversify. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, at least some of the predetermined information that has been subjected to the specific determination may be excluded from the target of the determination. This makes it possible to further restrict the occurrence of an event for which the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination is to be subjected to the determination of the assignment so that the profit given to the player does not become excessive. It is possible to do.

  Feature B2. When a plurality of pieces of the predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, within a range of the number of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination is determined. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further comprising a predetermined information number changing unit (a function of executing the processes of Steps S1902 and S1908 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for changing the number.

  According to the feature B2, when a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage unit, the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination is determined within a range of the number of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit. The number can be changed. In this case, as the number of pieces of predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means increases, the number of pieces of predetermined information that can be selected as the number of pieces of predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination increases. Here, it is assumed that the player wants to increase the number of types of the predetermined information that can be selected as the number of the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. Therefore, according to the configuration, it is possible to expect that a considerable number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage unit, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of pieces of predetermined information that have been subjected to the specific determination. Become.

  Feature B3. The feature B1 or B1 characterized by comprising a determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S1810 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for allowing a player to determine the number of the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. The gaming machine according to B2.

  According to the feature B3, the player can determine the number of pieces of predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of determining the number of pieces of the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination. Furthermore, according to this feature B3, when the predetermined information corresponding to the provision correspondence information is included in the predetermined information to be subjected to the specific determination determined by the player, a superior feeling is given to the player. It is possible to do.

Feature B4. A launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
In the game area, at least a first start ball entry section (upper operation port 23) and a second start ball entry section (lower operation port 24) as a start ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. ) Is provided,
The predetermined information storage means,
First predetermined information storage means (first holding area Ra) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start entry section;
A second predetermined information storage unit (a second holding area Rb) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the second start entry unit.
The assignment determining unit is configured to perform the assignment determination on each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit,
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining means at a timing earlier than the stored predetermined information is stored in the first predetermined information storage. Priority means (1st, 2nd, and 2nd) for making the identification determination by the identification means for the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if the identification information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means. The fourth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the third embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60).
In a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if a plurality of the predetermined information are stored in the first predetermined information storage means, the plurality of predetermined information are stored in the first predetermined information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the plurality of pieces of the predetermined information are restricted from being subjected to the specific determination.

  According to the feature B4, the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is a target of priority digestion, and the benefit given when the result of the determination is given is more advantageous. The player expects the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage unit to be the target of the assignment determination rather than the predetermined information stored in the storage unit to be the target of the assignment determination. In this case, in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if a plurality of the predetermined information is stored in the first predetermined information storage means, the plurality of predetermined information are subject to the execution of the specific determination. Is limited. Thus, even in such a situation, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the assignment determination or the specific determination with respect to the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage unit.

  Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B4, the features C1 to C17, and the features D1 to D3 may be applied to the configurations of the features B1 to B4. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Acquisition means (operating port prize processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring predetermined information (hold information) based on occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24) Function) and
Predetermined information storage means (first reservation area Ra and second reservation area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
It is determined whether or not the predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information (information that results in a jackpot). If a plurality of the predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, the plurality of the predetermined information are stored. A transition determination unit (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for sequentially performing the transition determination on predetermined information;
When the predetermined information subject to the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the advantage transition means (of the main control device 60) that transitions the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (round game) advantageous to the player. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62);
Before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means becomes a target of the migration determination, a destination specifying means (a first identification means) for identifying whether the specific predetermined information corresponds to the migration corresponding information or not. In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1003 and S1005 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is performed. In the second embodiment, the processing of steps S1703 and S1705 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is executed. Function, in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S2805 and S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the seventh embodiment, the processing of steps S2805 and S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 Function to execute)
When it is specified by the preceding specifying means that the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means in the advantageous game state corresponds to the shift correspondence information, the advantageous game state has ended. Special effect execution means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the steps S2613 and S2614 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth and sixth embodiments) for executing a special effect that allows the player to have such recognition that there is no special effect. Function in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the seventh embodiment).
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the advantageous gaming state has ended when the specific identifying information stored in the advantageous gaming state in the predetermined information storing means corresponds to the transition correspondence information by the preceding identifying means. A special effect is performed that allows the player to have a recognition that is not present. In this case, in the case where the advantageous gaming states are continuously executed without a large interval, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the plurality of advantageous gaming states as one advantageous gaming state. Thereby, even if the execution period of the advantageous gaming state is not extended, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous gaming state in which the execution period is longer than the normal advantageous gaming state can occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the special effect execution means continues the special effect at least until the new advantageous gaming state is started.

  According to the feature C2, the special effect is continued at least until a new advantageous game state is started, so that the one advantageous game state and the next advantageous game state that are continuously executed without much space are provided. It is easy for the player to recognize that the period between is a period in the middle of one advantageous gaming state.

Feature C3. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing a variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means enters the closed state after the variable ball entry means enters the open state;
With
In the advantageous game state, the variable ball control is executed a plurality of times with a standby period interposed therebetween,
The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the special effect execution means executes an effect that allows a player to recognize the standby period as the special effect.

  According to the feature C3, an effect that allows the player to recognize the standby period as a special effect is executed, so that one advantageous gaming state and the next advantageous game state that are continuously executed without much space. It is easy for the player to recognize that the period between the game state and the standby state is a standby period in one advantageous game state.

Feature C4. Game turn control means for controlling the game turn execution means so that the game turn operation is executed in response to the execution of the shift determination (a function of executing the game turn control means in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) When,
Period determining means (a function of executing a variable display time-related process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for determining a duration of the game repetition operation;
With
The period determining means determines a relatively short period as the continuation period from the end of the advantageous gaming state to the release condition being satisfied (the main control device in the fifth and seventh embodiments). In the sixth embodiment, the MPU 62 has a function of executing the processing of steps S3601 to S3603, and in the sixth embodiment, has a function of executing the processing of steps S3901 to S3902 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  According to the feature C4, in a case where the advantageous game states are continuously executed without a large interval, the time required from the end of one advantageous game state to the start of the next advantageous game state is shortened. It is possible to do. By executing a special effect between these advantageous game states, it becomes possible for the player to recognize a plurality of advantageous game states as one advantageous game state.

  Feature C5. The short-term determining means determines a relatively short period as the continuation time from the end of the advantageous gaming state until the release condition is satisfied, irrespective of the specification result of the preceding specifying means. A gaming machine according to feature C4.

  According to the feature C5, when the advantageous game state ends, the duration of the game round operation is uniquely set to a relatively short period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the state in which the duration of the game round operation is relatively short.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the release condition is that the game replay operation is performed a predetermined reference number of times after the advantageous gaming state ends.

  According to the feature C6, when the game replay operation is executed a predetermined reference number of times after the advantageous game state ends, the state in which the duration of the game replay operation is relatively short is released. With this configuration, when the advantageous game state ends regardless of the specification result of the preceding specifying means, in a configuration in which the duration of the game reusing operation is set to a relatively short period, the end of the state is triggered. It can be clear.

Feature C7. A launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
In the game area, at least a first start ball entry section (upper operation port 23) and a second start ball entry section (lower operation port 24) as a start ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. ) And is provided,
The predetermined information storage means,
A first predetermined information storage unit (a first holding area Ra) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the first start entry unit, with a first specified number as an upper limit; When,
A second predetermined information storage unit (second holding area Rb) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the second start entry unit, with a second specified number as an upper limit; When,
With
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination for each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit,
When the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is a target of the shift determination, the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means is a target of the shift determination. Is more advantageous than
In the gaming machine, when the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means at a timing earlier than the stored predetermined information is the same as the predetermined information. Priority means (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, right) elements for making the transition judgment for the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if they are stored in the first predetermined information storage means The fourth to seventh embodiments have a function of executing the process of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the third embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60).
The cancellation condition is that the game repetition operation is executed a number of times corresponding to a number smaller than the second prescribed number after the advantageous game state ends, wherein: Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C7, in the configuration in which the continuation period of the game round operation is set to a relatively short period when the advantageous game state ends regardless of the specification result of the preceding specifying unit, the second rule When the number of times of game replay operations corresponding to the number smaller than the number is executed, the state of the relatively short period is released. Accordingly, when the advantageous game state occurs in a state where the second predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the game recycle operation corresponding to all the predetermined information is performed for a relatively short period of time. It is possible to prevent it from ending. Then, the game circling operation triggered by the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is executed for a relatively long period, and during that time, the predetermined information is newly stored in the second predetermined information storage means. It can be stored. The predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is more advantageous than the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means and is preferentially subjected to the transition determination. By reducing the possibility of a situation in which the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the advantageous game state ends regardless of the specification result of the preceding specification means, the duration of the game replay operation is relatively reduced. Even if it is configured to be set to a state in which the period is short, it is difficult to disadvantage the player.

Feature C8. A switching control unit (a function of executing a process for supporting electric power in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for controlling the switching of the second starting ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state;
As a control mode of the switching control means, a first mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the second starting ball section is easily opened and the second starting ball section is more open than the first mode. There is a second mode (low-frequency support mode) in which the state is unlikely to be in the state or the second starting ball section is not in the open state,
The feature C7 is characterized in that, in at least the second mode, the short period determining means determines a relatively short period as the continuation period from the end of the advantageous gaming state until the release condition is satisfied. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature C8, in the second mode, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry portion, so that the game time is triggered by the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means. Since the use operation is performed for a relatively long period of time, it becomes possible to store new predetermined information in the second predetermined information storage means during that time.

  Feature C9. The short-term determining means determines that the specific information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous gaming state ends, and the short-term determining means is specified by the preceding specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C8, wherein when the advantageous gaming state ends, a relatively short period is determined as the continuation period until the release condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature C9, only when the predetermined information corresponding to the shift correspondence information is stored at the time when the advantageous gaming state ends, the state is set such that the duration of the game revolving operation is a relatively short period. You. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the duration of the game reusing operation from being set to a relatively short period until the advantageous game state is not continuously executed. .

  Feature C10. The gaming machine according to Feature C9, wherein the cancellation condition is that the advantageous gaming state newly occurs.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to reliably shorten the period until the advantageous gaming state newly occurs.

Feature C11. A launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
In the game area, at least a first start ball entry section (upper operation port 23) and a second start ball entry section (lower operation port 24) as a start ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. ) And is provided,
The predetermined information storage means,
A first predetermined information storage unit (a first holding area Ra) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the first start entry unit, with a first specified number as an upper limit; When,
A second predetermined information storage unit (second holding area Rb) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the second start entry unit, with a second specified number as an upper limit; When,
With
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination for each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit,
In the gaming machine, when the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means at a timing earlier than the stored predetermined information is the same as the predetermined information. Priority means (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, 3rd, right) elements for making the transition judgment for the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if they are stored in the first predetermined information storage means The fourth to seventh embodiments have a function of executing the process of step S504 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the third embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60).
The special effect execution means is configured to determine that the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous game state ends. If specified, the special effect is executed, and even if the predetermined information corresponding to the shift correspondence information is stored in the first predetermined information storage unit at the time when the advantageous game state ends, the special effect is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature C10, wherein no effect is performed.

  According to the feature C11, the special effect can be executed when the predetermined information of the second predetermined information storage means which is prioritized at the time of the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, whereas the special effect is not performed at the time of the transition determination. (1) Even if the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information, the special effect is not executed. In the case of a configuration in which the special effect is executed by using the predetermined information of the first predetermined information storage unit that is not prioritized in the transition determination, the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage unit before the predetermined information becomes a target of the transition determination. Then, the predetermined information in the second predetermined information storage means is preferentially subjected to the transition determination, and as a result, there is a concern that the special effect may be continued. On the other hand, such inconvenience can be prevented from occurring because the special effect is not executed with the predetermined information in the first predetermined information storage unit, which is not prioritized in the transition determination, as an opportunity.

Feature C12. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing a variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means enters the closed state after the variable ball entry means enters the open state;
With
In the advantageous game state, the variable ball control is executed a plurality of times with a standby period interposed therebetween,
The special effect execution means is configured to execute, as the special effect, an effect that allows the player to recognize the standby period,
The short-term determining means determines that the specific information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous gaming state ends, and the short-term determining means is specified by the preceding specifying means. In this case, the first variable entry control in the advantageous game state triggered by the specific information after the last execution of the variable entry control in the advantageous game state to be terminated is ended. The advantageous game state triggered by the specific information after the end of the advantageous game state to be ended, such that a period until the execution time is started is the same or substantially the same as the standby period. The gaming machine according to any one of features C9 to C11, wherein a continuation period of the gaming repetition operation until the game is performed is determined to be a relatively short period.

  According to the feature C12, in the case where the advantageous game state is continuously executed without a long interval, the variable execution control of the last execution time in one advantageous game state is completed and then the next advantageous game state is completed. The period until the variable ball-in control of the first execution is started is the same or substantially the same as the standby period, which is the period between the variable ball-in controls in the one advantageous gaming state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the period between one advantageous gaming state and the next advantageous gaming state, which are continuously executed without a large interval, is a period in the middle of the one advantageous gaming state. Become.

Feature C13. Opening setting means for generating an opening period before the first variable ball-in control is started in the advantageous gaming state (a process of setting numerical information corresponding to the opening period to the timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) When,
Ending setting means for generating an ending period after the last variable ball control in the advantageous gaming state (processing of setting numerical information corresponding to the ending period to a timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
If the specific information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous gaming state ends, the end target means Means for preventing at least one of the ending period of the nominated advantageous game state and the opening period of the advantageous game state triggered by the specific predetermined information from being set or a relatively short period. (A function of executing the processing of steps S4020 and S4208 in MPU 62 of main controller 60);
The gaming machine according to feature C12, comprising:

  According to the feature C13, not only the continuation period of the game round operation but also at least one of the ending period of one advantageous gaming state and the opening period of the next advantageous gaming state is to be adjusted. Thereby, the period from the end of the variable ball-in control of the last execution time in one advantageous game state to the start of the variable ball-in control of the first execution time in the next advantageous game state is set to one advantage. It is easy to set the same or substantially the same as the standby period, which is the period between multiple variable ball-in controls in the gaming state.

Feature C14. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing a variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means enters the closed state after the variable ball entry means enters the open state;
With
In the advantageous game state, the variable ball control is executed a plurality of times with a standby period interposed therebetween,
The special effect execution means is configured to execute, as the special effect, an effect that allows the player to recognize the standby period,
This gaming machine
Opening setting means for generating an opening period before the first variable ball-in control is started in the advantageous gaming state (a process of setting numerical information corresponding to the opening period to the timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) When,
Ending setting means for generating an ending period after the last variable ball control in the advantageous gaming state (processing of setting numerical information corresponding to the ending period to a timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
If the specific information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous gaming state ends, the end target means Means for preventing at least one of the ending period of the nominated advantageous game state and the opening period of the advantageous game state triggered by the specific predetermined information from being set or a relatively short period. (A function of executing the processing of steps S4020 and S4208 in MPU 62 of main controller 60);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, comprising:

  According to the feature C14, in a case where the advantageous game states are continuously executed without a large interval, the time required from the end of one advantageous game state to the start of the next advantageous game state is shortened. It is possible to do. By executing a special effect between these advantageous game states, it becomes possible for the player to recognize a plurality of advantageous game states as one advantageous game state.

Feature C15. A first first specifying means for specifying, by a predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state, whether or not specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information; Means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2801 to S2805 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
In the gaming machine, when it is specified by the first first specifying means that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the shift correspondence information, at the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state, the current advantageous gaming state A first notification unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3304 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) for performing a predetermined notification that enables the player to recognize that the execution period is extended,
The preceding specifying means is configured to specify whether or not specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information at a timing later than the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state. The second destination specifying means (the function of executing the process of step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth and sixth embodiments, and the process of step S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the seventh embodiment) Function to execute)
The special effect execution means is that the first predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means at the time when the advantageous game state ends corresponds to the shift correspondence information, The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C14, wherein the special effect is executed when specified by the second destination specifying unit.

  According to the feature C15, in accordance with the result of the first first specification executed up to the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state, the player is determined to extend the execution period of the current advantageous gaming state at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state. A predetermined notification that enables the user to recognize is performed. Thereby, the player expects that the predetermined notification is performed at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state. Further, the second first specification is performed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. If the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information in any of the first first specification and the second first specification, the special effect is thereafter performed. Is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the frequency of executing the special effect while enabling the predetermined notification at the predetermined timing.

  Feature C16. The gaming machine according to Feature C15, wherein the second destination specifying unit can set, as a specific target, the same predetermined information as the predetermined information specified by the first destination specifying unit.

  According to the feature C16, the first first specification and the second first specification can be performed on the same predetermined information. This makes it possible to accurately specify whether the predetermined information corresponding to the shift correspondence information is stored at the end of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature C17. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing a variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means enters the closed state after the variable ball entry means enters the open state;
With
In the advantageous game state, the variable ball control is executed a plurality of times with a standby period interposed therebetween,
In this gaming machine, ending setting means for generating an ending period after the last variable ball control in the advantageous gaming state is completed (a numerical information corresponding to the ending period is set in a timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). Processing).
The predetermined timing is a timing before the timing at which the variable ball control of the last execution time ends in the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine according to the feature C15 or C16, wherein the timing at which the second destination specifying unit specifies the timing is a timing after the timing at which the ending period is started.

  According to the feature C17, the predetermined notification can be executed at a timing before the ending period is started in the advantageous game state, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit until the ending period is started in the advantageous game state. It is possible to handle the specified information as information for specifying whether or not to execute the special effect.

  Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B4, the features C1 to C17, and the features D1 to D3 may be applied to the configurations of the features C1 to C17. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature group A, feature group B, and feature group C, the following problems can be solved.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area. Done. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and at the time of the final stop display of the variation display, the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed. A display effect for one game time to be displayed is executed. Further, when the lottery result is a so-called winning game transition winning, for example, after a display effect for one game is performed, for example, the opening and closing of a variable winning device provided in the game area is executed, The payout of the game balls according to the number of balls entered into the winning device is executed.

  Further, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which information used for a winning lottery is held and stored when a game ball enters a starting ball entry portion while a pattern is being displayed for change. In the case where the image is held and stored, after the variation display of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and held, and the next variation display of the pattern is started.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Acquisition means (operating port prize processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring predetermined information (hold information) based on occurrence of an acquisition trigger (winning to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24) Function) and
Predetermined information storage means (first reservation area Ra and second reservation area Rb) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
It is determined whether or not the predetermined information corresponds to the transition correspondence information (information that results in a jackpot). If a plurality of the predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage means, the plurality of the predetermined information are stored. A transition determination unit (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for sequentially performing the transition determination on predetermined information;
When the predetermined information targeted for the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, an advantage transition unit (a game state in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that transitions the game state to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Function to perform the migration process)
Before the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is subject to the transition determination, a specific result for specifying whether the specific predetermined information corresponds to the transition corresponding information is determined. A destination specifying unit that executes a destination specifying process to be checked (a function of executing the processes of steps S1003 and S1005 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first and fourth embodiments, and a main control device 60 in the second embodiment). Of the MPU 62 for executing the processing of steps S1703 and S1705, in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S2805 and S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and in the seventh embodiment Execute the processing of steps S2805 and S4203 in MPU 62 of control device 60 And that function),
Notification control means for executing the notification of the destination specification corresponding to the result of the destination specifying process (in the fifth and sixth embodiments, steps S2806 to S2809, steps S3406 to S3806 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) A function of executing the processing of S3408, in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2806 to S2809, S4209, and S4211 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
With
The gaming machine, wherein the destination specifying means can execute the destination specifying process for the same predetermined information a plurality of times.

  According to the feature D1, by executing the destination specifying notification corresponding to the result of the destination specifying process, the player can grasp the information corresponding to the result of the shift determination in advance. In this case, the destination specifying process may be executed a plurality of times for the same predetermined information. Thus, it is possible to accurately specify the destination as to whether or not the predetermined information corresponding to the transition correspondence information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit.

Feature D2. The destination specifying means,
By a predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state, a first destination specifying means (main control device 60) for specifying whether or not specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information. A function of executing the processing of steps S2801 to S2805 in the MPU 62)
A second destination specifying means for specifying whether or not specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information at a timing later than the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state; (In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4203 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60)
With
The notification control means,
Means (main control device) for executing a first notification as the destination specifying correspondence notification when the first destination specifying means specifies that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the shift correspondence information. A function of executing the processing of steps S2806 to S2809 in the MPU 62 of the H.60);
When it is specified by the first destination specifying means or the second destination specifying means that the specific predetermined information corresponds to the shift correspondence information, a second notification is executed as the destination specifying notification. (In the fifth and sixth embodiments, a function of executing the processing of steps S3406 to S3408 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; in the seventh embodiment, steps S4209 and S4211 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) Function to execute the process),
With
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the second destination specifying unit can set, as a specific target, the same predetermined information as the predetermined information specified by the first destination specifying unit.

  According to the feature D2, the first notification is performed at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state in accordance with the first first specified result executed up to the predetermined timing in the advantageous gaming state. Thereby, the player expects that the first notification is performed at the predetermined timing of the advantageous gaming state. Further, the second first specification is performed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. If the specific predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information in any of the first first specification and the second first specification, then the second predetermined Notification is performed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the second notification is executed, while enabling the first notification to be executed at a predetermined timing. Also, the first destination specification and the second destination specification can be performed on the same predetermined information. This makes it possible to accurately specify whether the predetermined information corresponding to the shift correspondence information is stored at the end of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature D3. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 22) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for performing a variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means enters the closed state after the variable ball entry means enters the open state;
With
In the advantageous game state, the variable ball control is executed a plurality of times with a standby period interposed therebetween,
In this gaming machine, ending setting means for generating an ending period after the last variable ball control in the advantageous gaming state is completed (a numerical information corresponding to the ending period is set in a timer counter T in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). Processing).
The predetermined timing is a timing before the timing at which the variable ball control of the last execution time ends in the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine according to the feature D2, wherein the timing at which the second destination specifying unit specifies is a timing after the timing at which the ending period is started.

  According to the feature D3, the first information can be executed at a timing before the ending period is started in the advantageous gaming state, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit until the ending period is started in the advantageous gaming state. The stored predetermined information can be treated as information for specifying whether or not to execute the second notification.

  Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B4, the features C1 to C17, and the features D1 to D3 may be applied to the configurations of the features D1 to D3. As a result, a synergistic effect of the combined configuration can be achieved.

  According to the invention relating to the feature D group, the following problem can be solved.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area. Done. In addition, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variation display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and at the time of the final stop display of the variation display, the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed. A display effect for one game time to be displayed is executed. Further, when the lottery result is a so-called winning game transition winning, for example, after a display effect for one game is performed, for example, the opening and closing of a variable winning device provided in the game area is executed, The payout of the game balls according to the number of balls entered into the winning device is executed.

  Further, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which information used for a winning lottery is held and stored when a game ball enters a starting ball entry portion while a pattern is being displayed for change. In the case where the image is held and stored, after the variation display of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and held, and the next variation display of the pattern is started.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as those described above, it is necessary to accurately specify the information stored and stored, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus granted to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  A spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by operation of a start operation means, and caused by operation of a stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped by a predetermined time or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  22: variable winning device, 23: upper working port, 24: lower working port, 60: main control device, 62: MPU, 81: game ball launching mechanism, 100: display control device, 102: MPU, Ra: first hold Area, Rb: second holding area, T: timer counter.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player,
In the game area, at least a first start ball entry section and a second start ball entry section are provided as a start ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
This gaming machine
Acquiring means for acquiring predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first starting ball entry section, and acquiring predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the second starting ball entry section; ,
A first predetermined information storage unit that stores the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining unit when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry unit, with a first specified number as an upper limit;
A second predetermined information storage unit that stores the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit when a game ball enters the second start entry unit, with a second specified number as an upper limit;
A shift determination is made as to whether the predetermined information corresponds to the shift correspondence information, and the shift is performed for each of the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage unit or the second predetermined information storage unit. Shift determination means for performing determination,
A game turn control means for controlling a game turn execution means so that a game turn operation is executed in correspondence with the execution of the shift determination;
Period determining means for determining a continuation period of the game round operation,
When the predetermined information targeted for the transition determination corresponds to the transition correspondence information, an advantageous transition unit that transitions a gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player,
When the predetermined information is stored in the second predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information obtained by the obtaining means at a timing earlier than the stored predetermined information is stored in the first predetermined information storage. Priority means for causing the transition determination to be performed on the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means, even if stored in the means;
Destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the specific information corresponds to the migration corresponding information before the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is subjected to the migration determination When,
In the case where it is specified by the preceding specifying means that the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous gaming state ends, Special effect execution means for executing a special effect for enabling the player to recognize that the game state has not ended,
With
When the predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means is a target of the shift determination, the predetermined information stored in the first predetermined information storage means is a target of the shift determination. Is more advantageous than
The period determining means is configured to execute the game cycle executed after the release condition is satisfied, as the continuation period from the end of the advantageous game state to the release condition being satisfied, regardless of the specification result of the destination specifying means. Short-term determination means for determining a period shorter than a predetermined duration selected in the operation for
The release conditions state, and are said advantageously gaming state is executed the number of times of operation for the game times from the end corresponding to the number smaller than said second prescribed number,
The special effect execution means is configured to determine that the specific predetermined information stored in the second predetermined information storage means corresponds to the shift correspondence information at the time when the advantageous game state ends. When specified, the game replay operation triggered by the specific predetermined information corresponds to the number of times the game replay operation is executed after the end of the advantageous game state, which is smaller than the second prescribed number. A gaming machine characterized in that a special effect is executed so as to enable a player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state has not ended when the number of executions is less than or equal to the number of times .

Images